Superior P910I User Manual

This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
P910i  
User Guide  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Contents  
Entering text..................................................................... 32  
P910i locks....................................................................... 42  
OVERVIEW  
Introduction................................................................. 9  
Phone.......................................................................... 45  
Call handling with the flip closed.................................... 45  
Call handling with the flip open ...................................... 48  
Handling two or more calls.............................................. 50  
Call list and call log ......................................................... 52  
Hints and smart functions ................................................ 52  
Preferences....................................................................... 58  
Getting to know your P910i...................................... 10  
P910i package................................................................... 10  
P910i overview................................................................. 11  
SIM card ........................................................................... 12  
Battery .............................................................................. 12  
Care instructions............................................................... 13  
First time start-up.............................................................. 14  
Turning your P910i on and off ......................................... 14  
Importing phone book entries........................................... 14  
Flip closed mode............................................................... 15  
Flip open mode ................................................................. 16  
Flip removed..................................................................... 17  
Screen areas ...................................................................... 18  
Jog Dial ............................................................................ 19  
Keypad functions ............................................................. 20  
Indicators and status bar icons.......................................... 21  
Memory Stick ................................................................... 22  
Connecting the accessories............................................... 25  
Services............................................................................. 25  
Applications - overview.................................................... 26  
Updating the software....................................................... 28  
General functions.............................................................. 28  
MEDIA  
CommuniCorder....................................................... 64  
Recording video clips ...................................................... 64  
Taking pictures ................................................................ 66  
Camera settings................................................................ 67  
Pictures and Image editor........................................ 69  
Pictures ............................................................................ 69  
Image editor ..................................................................... 71  
Video .......................................................................... 73  
Video clips ....................................................................... 73  
Streaming......................................................................... 75  
Preferences....................................................................... 76  
3
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Music player............................................................... 77  
Playing sound files............................................................ 77  
Managing sound files........................................................ 78  
Calendar .................................................................. 113  
Creating calendar entries................................................ 113  
Managing calendar entries ............................................. 114  
Sending and receiving calendar entries.......................... 115  
Preferences..................................................................... 115  
Internet....................................................................... 81  
Using the browser view .................................................... 82  
Preferences........................................................................ 86  
Lunar calendar........................................................ 116  
Tasks ........................................................................ 117  
Creating task entries....................................................... 117  
Managing task entries .................................................... 118  
Moving task entries........................................................ 118  
Sending and receiving task entries................................. 119  
Preferences..................................................................... 119  
Games ......................................................................... 89  
Chess................................................................................. 89  
Solitaire............................................................................. 89  
BUSINESS  
Messages..................................................................... 91  
Folders in Messages.......................................................... 92  
The accounts in Messages ................................................ 93  
Handling text messages .................................................... 93  
Handling multimedia messages ........................................ 94  
Handling email.................................................................. 98  
More about messaging.................................................... 102  
Jotter ........................................................................ 120  
Creating and editing notes ............................................. 120  
Drawing pictures............................................................ 121  
Managing notes.............................................................. 121  
Sending and receiving notes .......................................... 121  
TOOLS  
Contacts.................................................................... 105  
Using Contacts with the flip closed................................ 105  
Using Contacts with the flip open .................................. 107  
Creating and editing contacts.......................................... 108  
Managing contacts.......................................................... 110  
Making an owner card .................................................... 111  
Preferences...................................................................... 111  
Sound recorder........................................................ 122  
Making sound recordings............................................... 122  
Using sound recordings as ring signals.......................... 122  
Sending sound recordings.............................................. 123  
4
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Calculator................................................................. 124  
Installing applications ............................................ 140  
Installing applications on your P910i ............................ 140  
Removing applications from your P910i....................... 142  
Sony Ericsson Update Service....................................... 142  
Time.......................................................................... 125  
Setting time and date ...................................................... 125  
Setting locations ............................................................. 126  
Setting number formats .................................................. 126  
Setting alarms ................................................................. 127  
Connecting to other devices ................................... 143  
Connection via SyncStation........................................... 143  
Connection via Infrared port.......................................... 144  
Connection via Bluetooth wireless technology ............. 144  
Viewers and editors – Quickoffice......................... 128  
Common viewer and editor functions ............................ 128  
Quickword ...................................................................... 129  
Quicksheet ..................................................................... 129  
Quickpoint ...................................................................... 130  
Pdf+ .............................................................................. 131  
Synchronization and backup ................................. 148  
Local synchronization.................................................... 148  
Remote synchronization ................................................ 149  
Backing up data ............................................................. 150  
Restoring data ................................................................ 151  
File manager ............................................................ 132  
Online services......................................................... 134  
SETTINGS  
Personalizing your P910i........................................ 152  
Themes........................................................................... 152  
Changing your application shortcuts ............................. 152  
Setting a background picture ......................................... 152  
Setting the light intensity ............................................... 152  
Setting a screen saver..................................................... 153  
Adding images to your Contacts.................................... 153  
Ring signals.................................................................... 153  
Alarm tones and sound notification............................... 154  
Dictionary................................................................. 135  
Searching for a word....................................................... 135  
History record and bookmarks ....................................... 136  
Dictionary database ........................................................ 137  
Settings ........................................................................... 137  
ADVANCED FUNCTIONS  
PC Suite and Content and Application ................. 138  
Sony Ericsson PC Suite.................................................. 138  
Content and Application................................................. 139  
5
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Secure tokens ................................................................. 176  
Storage manager............................................................. 177  
WIM PIN settings .......................................................... 178  
Control panel ........................................................... 155  
The Device tab  
Application shortcuts...................................................... 155  
Display............................................................................ 155  
Flight mode..................................................................... 157  
International.................................................................... 157  
Locks............................................................................... 157  
Sounds and alerts ............................................................ 157  
Text input........................................................................ 159  
Themes............................................................................ 159  
Time & date .................................................................... 160  
User greeting................................................................... 161  
Getting started with Internet and Messages......... 179  
Introduction.................................................................... 179  
Automatically set up service provider and messaging... 180  
Manually set up service provider................................... 180  
Manually set up messaging............................................ 181  
Setting up WAP accounts .............................................. 182  
Using your P910i as a modem ....................................... 182  
GPRS - connection information..................................... 184  
REFERENCE  
The Connections tab  
Troubleshooting ...................................................... 186  
Bluetooth......................................................................... 161  
Cable............................................................................... 162  
GSM Networks............................................................... 162  
Infrared ........................................................................... 163  
Internet accounts............................................................. 163  
Messaging accounts........................................................ 167  
WAP accounts ................................................................ 173  
Guidelines for safe and efficient use...................... 192  
Limited warranty............................................................ 194  
FCC Statement............................................................... 195  
Environmental information............................................ 195  
Declaration of Conformity............................................. 195  
Terms and definitions............................................. 196  
Technical data ......................................................... 204  
Index......................................................................... 208  
The Other tab  
Certificate manager......................................................... 174  
Flip settings..................................................................... 175  
Format disk..................................................................... 175  
IP Security manager........................................................ 175  
Language selection ......................................................... 175  
Master reset..................................................................... 176  
6
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Sony Ericsson P910i  
This product contains software copyright © Beatnik, Inc.  
1996-2002.  
User Guide  
Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered  
trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.End-user  
license agreement for SunJavaJ2ME:  
Second edition (February 2005)  
This User Guide is published by Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB,  
without any warranty. Improvements and changes to this User Guide necessitated  
by typographical errors, inaccuracies of current information, or improvements to  
programs and/or equipment, may be made by Sony Ericsson Mobile  
Communications AB at any time and without notice. Such changes will, however,  
be incorporated into new editions of this User Guide.  
©Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB, 2004. All rights reserved.  
Publication number: EN/LZT 162 21 R2A  
The Bluetoothword mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and  
any use of such marks by Sony Ericsson is under license.  
Symbian and all Symbian-based marks and logos are trademarks of Symbian  
Limited.  
Memory Stick™, Memory Stick Duoand Memory Stick PRO Duoare  
trademarks of Sony, its parent and/or its affiliates.  
Beatnik is a trademark of Beatnik, Inc.  
T9™ Text Input is a trademark or a registered trademark of Tegic  
Communications.  
1. Restrictions: Software is confidential copyrighted information of Sun and title to  
all copies is retained by Sun and/or its licensors. Customer shall not modify,  
decompile, disassemble, decrypt, extract, or otherwise reverse engineer Software.  
Software may not be leased, assigned, or sublicensed, in whole or in part.  
2. Export Regulations: Software, including technical data, is subject to U.S. export  
control laws, including the U.S. Export Administration Act and its associated  
regulations, and may be subject to export or import regulations in other countries.  
The Customer agrees to comply strictly with all such regulations and  
acknowledges that it has the responsibility to obtain licenses to export, re-export,  
or import Software. Software may not be downloaded, or otherwise exported or  
re-exported (i) into, or to a national or resident of, Cuba, Iraq, Iran, North Korea,  
Libya, Sudan, Syria (as such listing may be revised from time to time) or any  
country to which the U.S. has embargoed goods; or (ii) to anyone on the U.S.  
Treasury Department's list of Specially Designated Nations or the U.S. Commerce  
Department's Table of Denial Orders.  
T9™ Text Input is licensed under one or more of the following: U.S. Pat. Nos.  
5,818,437, 5,953,541, 5,187,480, 5,945,928, and 6,011,554; Canadian Pat. No.  
1,331,057, United Kingdom Pat. No. 2238414B, Hong Kong Standard Pat. No.  
HK0940329; Republic of Singapore Pat. No. 51383; Euro. Pat. No. 0 842 463  
(96927260.8) DE/DK, FI, FR, IT, NL, PT, ES, SE, GB; and additional patents are  
pending worldwide.  
3. Restricted Rights: Use, duplication or disclosure by the United States  
government is subject to the restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data  
and Computer Software Clauses in DFARS 252.227-7013(c) (1) (ii) and FAR  
52.227-19(c) (2) as applicable.  
Copyright © SyncML initiative Ltd. (1999-2002). All rights reserved.  
Portions of software © PacketVideo Corporation (USA) 1999, 2002. PacketVideo,  
pvPlayer and the PacketVideo logo are trademarks of PacketVideo Corporation.  
All rights reserved.  
Quicksheet, Quickoffice and Quickword are either trademarks or registered  
trademarks of Cutting Edge Software, Inc.  
Adobe and Acrobat are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe  
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.  
Microsoft Outlook, Visual Basic, Windows and PowerPoint are either registered  
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the Unites States and/or  
other countries.  
Other product and company names mentioned herein may be the trademarks of  
their respective owners.  
Any rights not expressly granted herein are reserved.  
Apple is a trademark of Apple Corporation, Inc.  
AppForge is a trademark of AppForge, Inc.  
Lotus Notes and Lotus Organizer are trademarks of International Business  
Machines Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both.  
7
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Note Some of the services in this User Guide are not supported by all networks.  
This also applies to the GSM International Emergency Number 112. Please contact  
your network operator or service provider if you are in doubt whether you can use  
a particular service or not.  
Important  
Your mobile phone has the capability to load, store and forward additional content,  
e.g. ring tone melodies. The use of such content may be restricted or prohibited by  
rights of third parties, including but not limited to restriction under applicable  
copyright laws. You, and not Sony Ericsson, are entirely responsible for additional  
content that you download to or forward from your mobile phone. Prior to your use  
of any additional content, please verify that your intended use is properly licensed  
or is otherwise authorized. Sony Ericsson does not guarantee the accuracy,  
integrity or quality of any additional content or any other third-party content.  
Under no circumstances will Sony Ericsson be liable in any way for your improper  
use of additional content or other third party content.  
Note Sony Ericsson advise users to backup their personal data  
information.  
Note All pictures are for illustration only, and may not perfectly  
show the real phone.  
8
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
OVERVIEW  
Introduction  
For ease of reference the Getting to know your P910i chapter  
gives a quick overview of the main functions of the phone,  
shortcuts and general information.  
The P910i also contains an organizer,  
which includes contacts, a calendar,  
notes and email, all of which can be  
quickly and efficiently synchronized  
with a PC. The email application  
supports attachments. Viewers let you  
read and edit documents in various  
formats such as Microsoft® Word  
and Excel®.  
Your P910i combines advanced business and entertainment  
features in one intuitive device.  
Its camera lets you take pictures and record video wherever you  
are and use them in a wide range of applications. The pictures  
can be used in the Picture Phone Book, where they can be used  
to identify callers.  
With Sony Ericsson Update Service  
you can keep your phone updated  
with the latest P910i software.  
MMS (Multimedia Messaging Service) allows you to send and  
receive messages that include pictures, sound, text and voice  
notes.  
The complete P910i documentation  
consists of the following parts:  
The P910i features advanced entertainment functionality that  
offers high quality MP3 music and widescreen format video  
clips and 3D games. New content can be downloaded quickly  
and easily from Internet sites or transferred to the phone via  
BluetoothWireless Technology, an infrared port or a cable.  
Extra memory is available through a Memory Stick, which  
also serves as a convenient way to exchange content and  
applications such as Javagames.  
Quick Guide  
User Guide  
Instruction for removing the flip  
Help texts in the P910i  
Complementary information on the Internet, refer to  
www.SonyEricsson.com  
The P910i can be used as a corporate phone with Ericsson  
MD110 and Business Phone exchanges.  
Introduction  
9
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Getting to know your P910i  
P910i package  
A
B
C
D
E
F
P910i with stylus  
Battery  
M
Travel charger  
SyncStation  
A
Stereo headset  
P910i  
Protective bag and strap  
Extra stylus  
G
H
J
Memory Stick  
F
B
Memory Stick adapter  
Flip replacement cover  
Flip replacement tool set  
User documentation package  
2 CDs, Sony Ericsson PC Suite and Content and Application  
K
L
D
M
N
L
N
K
C
Note The design of the charger will differ depending on the  
market.  
H
Note If your package does not include all the listed items above,  
please contact your retailer.  
J
E
G
Note Before you can use your P910i you need to insert the SIM  
card, and insert and charge the battery. Always detach the  
charger before you insert or remove the SIM card.  
10  
Getting to know your P910i  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
P910i overview  
A
B
F
A
D
C
G
E
F
D
H
I
B
G
C
E
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Stylus  
A
B
C
D
E
F
Indicator light for Bluetooth wireless technology (blue)  
Screen  
External antenna connector  
CommuniCorder  
Flip with keypad and keyboard  
Battery compartment  
Connector for accessories and charger  
Connector for stereo headset  
Jog Dial  
Indicator light for network and battery (green/red)  
CommuniCorder activation and shutter release  
Internet button for activation of the browser  
Slot for Memory Stick  
G
Infrared port  
On/Off button  
Getting to know your P910i  
11  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
SIM card  
Battery  
When you register as a subscriber with  
a network operator, you receive a SIM  
(Subscriber Identity Module) card.  
The SIM card contains a computer  
chip that keeps track of your phone  
number, the services included in your  
subscription and your phone book  
information, among other things.  
Before you use your P910i for the first time, charge the battery  
provided for at least 4 hours. Use the supplied charger. See  
‘Charging the battery’ on page 13.  
Insertion and removal  
To insert the battery  
1. Ensure that the flip is closed.  
A PIN (Personal Identity Number)  
code is supplied with the SIM card  
from your operator and must be  
entered when switching on the P910i.  
2. Remove the battery cover by  
sliding it downwards.  
3. Place the battery in the  
battery compartment and  
close the cover.  
Open the battery cover by pressing  
slightly on its upper part and slide it  
down the P910i. Insert the SIM card as shown in the picture.  
To remove the battery  
1. Ensure that your P910i is  
turned off.  
Some subscriptions are limited to call only predefined numbers,  
so-called Fixed Dialling Numbers (FDN). To avoid problems  
when travelling abroad, these predefined numbers should be  
defined as international numbers starting with +, for example  
+4613244500. In order to speed up calling while at home, the  
same numbers can also be added in the national number format,  
for example 013244500.  
Note It is important that you always turn off your P910i before  
removing the battery. Failure to do so can result in loss of  
information.  
2. Remove the battery cover by sliding it downwards.  
3. Use your fingernail at the lower left-hand edge of the battery  
to gently lift the lower edge of the battery outwards.  
For more information. see ‘Copying contacts to and from the  
SIM card’ on page 111.  
4. Take out the battery.  
12  
Getting to know your P910i  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
4. Wait approximately 4 hours or  
Charging the battery  
until the battery meter on the  
When the battery needs to be charged, a beep is heard. The  
indicator light (on the top of your P910i) flashes red and a  
battery low message appears on the screen.  
screen is full and the indicator  
on the top of the P910i shows  
a steady green light.  
The battery can be charged whenever you want. The P910i  
performance is not affected. However, using your P910i  
while charging increases the charging time.  
5. Remove the charger by tilting  
the plug upwards.  
Tip You can also use other battery chargers that have been  
supplied with other Sony Ericsson mobile phones using the same  
connector plug, for example, T300 or P900.  
To charge the battery  
The P910i can be charged either when it is switched on or off.  
1. Make sure the battery is inserted in your P910i and the cover  
is closed.  
Note When the battery is completely discharged, or new, it may  
take up to 30 minutes before the battery icon  
screen.  
appears on the  
2. Connect the charger to  
the P910i at the base of  
the phone by the flash  
symbol. The charger  
plug flash symbol must  
face upwards.  
Care instructions  
Your P910i is a highly sophisticated electronic device. To get  
the most out of it, please make sure that you follow this advice:  
3. Connect the charger to the mains.  
Keep the P910i in its protective carry case when not using it.  
Use a lightly moistened cloth when you clean the screen.  
Use only the stylus provided to tap the screen.  
Charging is indicated by the battery icon  
on the screen  
pulsing continuously, and the indicator at the top of the P910i  
showing a steady red light (or green, if the P910i is switched  
on).  
See also ‘Battery Use and Care’ on page 193.  
Getting to know your P910i  
13  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
functions. Set your P910i in Flight mode where the use of mobile  
phones is not allowed, or if you want to use the other functions  
but do not want incoming calls.  
First time start-up  
Please read ‘Guidelines for safe and efficient use’ on page 192  
before you start using your P910i.  
Note The first time you start your phone the start-up procedure  
will proceed slowly.  
Importing phone book entries  
You may want to import existing contact information from  
When you start your P910i for the first time  
another mobile phone to your P910i. You can do this in several  
ways:  
1. Press the On/Off button to turn on your P910i, keeping the flip  
closed. The language selection dialog opens.  
Beam the phone book entries from the other phone by  
2. Select one of the languages from the list. Read more about  
infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology and save the set to  
Contacts. See ‘Creating and editing contacts’ on  
page 108.  
selecting a language in ‘Language selection’ on page 175.  
3. Open the flip. Press the On/Off button again. The Setup Wizard  
starts and guides you through the essential settings.  
Synchronize the SIM and the internal memory on the other  
phone with Microsoft Outlook or Lotus Notes in a PC. Then  
4. The Power menu opens. Select Phone on.  
5. Enter your PIN when the dialog box appears and press  
synchronize this information with  
Contacts.  
. Press  
to delete a digit.  
Note When you synchronize Contacts with your PC, the SIM  
information will not be synchronized. You might get two versions  
of the same contact. See ‘Synchronization and backup’ on  
page 148.  
Turning your P910i on and off  
By default the Power menu prompts you to choose normal  
operation or Flight mode each time you press the On/Off button.  
These settings can be turned off. See To use the Power menu’  
on page 54.  
Phone book entries stored on your SIM card are accessible  
through Contacts. Select SIM in the folders menu to the  
right in the menu bar to see the list of entries in your SIM  
phone book. These entries can be imported to  
See ‘Copying contacts to and from the SIM card’ on  
page 111.  
Contacts  
.
In Flight mode the phone radio transmitter and Bluetooth  
functions are switched off, but you can still use the other  
14  
Getting to know your P910i  
             
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
D
E
Shortcut to the Calendar application  
Flip closed mode  
Shows all applications available in flip closed mode  
With the keypad flip closed, the P910i can be used as a  
conventional mobile phone using the keypad to dial and the Jog  
Dial to navigate. For more information please see ‘Jog Dial’ on  
page 19 and ‘Keypad functions’ on page 20.  
C
B
D
A
You can open the flip at any time to continue working. Many  
more functions are available when the flip is open.  
Applications  
CommuniCorder  
Sony Ericsson  
E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Music player  
Messages  
Contacts  
Calendar  
Tasks  
Standby view  
11:20am  
Call list  
21/066/2004  
Applications  
Jotter  
Sound recorder  
The standby view shows shortcuts to the most commonly used  
applications. Choose which shortcuts you want to use in  
standby. See ‘Personalizing your P910i’ on page 152.  
Selecting and starting applications  
Rotate the Jog Dial to select an application. Press the Jog Dial  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CommuniCorder  
Music player  
Messages  
Contacts  
Calendar  
Tasks  
Jotter  
Sound recorder  
Connections  
inwards or  
to start the application.  
Tip When  
view is selected, it is also possible to start an  
application by pressing its specific number.  
Closing applications  
The current application automatically closes and the data is  
saved when you return to the standby view or switch to another  
application. To return to standby, press and hold  
Jog Dial backwards.  
Touch the Jog Dial to see the shortcut icons  
A
B
C
Shortcut to the Messages application  
Shortcut to the Contacts application  
Shortcut to the Call list application  
or press the  
Getting to know your P910i  
15  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Options menu  
Press  
or press the Jog Dial forwards to open the standby  
C
D
E
B
options menu to get access to keylock, battery status, accepted  
callers and more.  
F
CommuniCorder  
Pictures  
A
Video  
Music player  
Internet  
Flip open mode  
Messages  
Contacts  
Applications Edit  
All  
When the flip is opened, the large touch-screen is revealed. You  
use the stylus to tap the screen to navigate and enter data. There  
is also a handwriting recognition feature, so that you can use the  
stylus to write on the screen.  
CommuniCorder  
Pictures  
Phone  
Video  
Calendar  
LunarCalendar  
Music player  
Internet  
Tasks  
Jotter  
Messages  
Contacts  
Phone  
A
B
C
D
E
F
Shortcut to the Messages application  
Shortcut to the Contacts application  
Shortcut to the Phone application  
Control panel  
Calculator  
Quicksheet  
Calendar  
LunarCalendar  
Tasks  
Jotter  
Quickword  
Pdf+  
Sound recorder  
Controlpanel  
PDF  
Shortcut to the Calendar application  
Shortcut to the Internet application  
Shows all applications available in flip open mode  
File Manager  
Storage Wizard  
Remote Sync  
Demo  
GPRS data log  
Chess  
Solitaire  
Time  
Dictionary  
16  
Getting to know your P910i  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
The Jog Dial provides further navigation and selection  
capability. Closing the flip generally ends an activity and saves  
You can use a virtual flip when the real flip is removed. Tap the  
the data. Multimedia phone calls and data sessions will,  
Virtual flip  
Enable virtual flip checkbox in  
Control Panel > Other > Flip  
however, continue.  
settings and select the check box to activate it. When the virtual  
flip is enabled, is shown on the status bar. Select to  
‘open’ the virtual flip.  
You can change the shortcuts A-E. See ‘Changing your  
application shortcuts’ on page 152.  
When the virtual flip is opened, the virtual flip keypad is shown.  
Select to ‘close’ the virtual flip.  
Navigation  
When the flip is open, the application shortcut icons shown in  
the flip closed mode move to the top row in the flip open screen.  
You navigate by using the stylus and tapping selected items and  
by using the Jog Dial, see ‘Jog Dial’ on page 19.  
Flip removed  
The flip can also be removed, which makes the organizer  
applications easier to access. When the flip is removed, the  
P910i works in flip open mode.  
Note Turn off the P910i before you remove the flip to avoid to  
damage your phone.  
To remove and attach the flip, refer to the separate instructions.  
Note Please note that Sony Ericsson does not accept any  
liability for lost parts or product defects resulting from any  
disassembly or modification of the product.  
Getting to know your P910i  
17  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Screen areas  
Item  
Description  
When the flip is closed, you use the keyboard and the Jog Dial.  
When the flip is open the screen is touch-sensitive. The screen is  
divided into a number of areas: see the figure and table below.  
A Application Displays six icons for quick and easy access to the  
picker most common applications. These can be customized.  
B Menu bar Usually contains two menus on the left, and a folder  
menu on the right. The two left-hand menus contain:  
• the application menu, whose name is always the  
same as the application. It contains the system  
A
E
F
I
n
te  
r
t
B
11:03  
John Smith  
+4613244500 (h)  
services used by most applications, such as Find  
,
Send as, and Delete  
• the edit menus contain editing items such as Cut  
Preferences and Help.  
.
C
B
C
,
Copy Paste, Zoom,  
,
Sony Ericsson  
With the flip closed, the menu bar often shows the  
function of the key.  
C Application Applications use this central area of the screen to  
End call  
D
E
area  
display the essential information.  
Many of the applications are based on two standard  
view layouts: a list view and a detail view.  
D Button bar An application view displays a button bar that  
contains useful controls and shortcuts. Not all  
application views require a button bar.  
E Status bar Displays device status information such as: signal  
strength, battery and device information, settings for  
sounds and time, on-screen keyboard, as well as  
temporary indicators such as missed calls and unread  
messages.  
F Title bar  
Displays the name of the active application.  
18  
Getting to know your P910i  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Jog Dial  
Action  
Function  
Up  
Rotate the Jog Dial up  
Scrolls items in a list up/to the left,  
increases volume during a call, moves  
back a page when playing a  
multimedia message.  
Rotate the Jog Dial down  
Press the Jog Dial inwards  
Scrolls items in a list down/to the  
right, decreases volume during a call,  
moves forward a page when playing a  
multimedia message.  
Down  
Selects a highlighted item, dials  
selected phone numbers. Generally the  
same action as  
in flip closed.  
Inwards  
Press the Jog Dial backwards Goes back to the previous screen,  
dismisses dialogs, and sends a busy  
signal to the calling party when you  
receive a call. It will not end a call.  
Always the same action as  
closed and in flip open.  
in flip  
Press the Jog Dial forwards  
Flip closed: Brings up the Options  
menu. Press and hold takes you to the  
Applications list.  
Backwards  
Forwards  
Flip open: Toggles the Application,  
Edit and Category menus. Press and  
hold takes you to the Application  
launcher.  
Getting to know your P910i  
19  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Key  
Function  
Keypad functions  
STAR  
Key  
Function  
• Enter the character  
*.  
• Press and hold to enter a  
p
(pause) character.  
OK  
• Press to switch between different input types (for  
Chinese input Pinyin, Stroke, 123; for Latin  
input Abc, abc, ABC, 123). This is useful when  
writing SMS or similar texts.  
• Press and hold to change between T9 and  
multitap.  
• Enter selected function, indicated on the display  
above the key.  
BACK  
• Return to previous menu.  
• Reject an incoming call.  
• Press and hold to return to Standby.  
HASH  
• Enter the character #.  
CLEAR  
• Delete entered characters/digits from the screen  
one by one.  
• Press and hold to delete an entire row of entered  
characters/digits.  
• Delete an entry from Contacts, Calendar, Tasks,  
Sound Recorder, and Messages.  
• Press and hold to disconnect the microphone  
(mute function) when a call is in progress.  
• Mute the ring signal during an incoming call.  
• Pause/play the melody when the Music player is  
open.  
• Press and hold to select input language. (English  
or Chinese).  
• Terminate the input of PIN and security codes.  
• Retrieve a phone number from the SIM card  
phone book. Enter the number of the memory  
position and then press  
.
-
NUMERIC KEYS  
• Enter the digits 0 to 9.  
• Enter associated characters or perform associated  
functions. See ‘Shortcuts’ on page 47.  
• Press and hold digits 1 to open voice mail.  
• Press and hold digits 2 to 9 to open Contacts.  
• Press and hold to put the P910i into silent mode,  
when in the standby view.  
OPTIONS  
• Open the menu with different options for  
different applications.  
• Press and hold to open Applications.  
20  
Getting to know your P910i  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Icon  
Function  
Indicators and status bar icons  
Calls screened  
These icons appear in the flip closed standby screen or in the  
status bar when the flip is open. When the flip is open, you can  
often tap the icons to get more detailed information or start an  
application.  
SMS notification  
MMS notification  
Email notification  
SMS overflow  
Time  
Icon  
Function  
Signal strength, GPRS available  
Signal strength, GPRS not available  
Battery strength  
Time, alarm set  
Keylock  
Bluetooth on  
Bluetooth discoverable  
Bluetooth headset connected  
Infrared on  
Magic word  
Keyboard  
Multimedia volume  
Speakerphone  
Muted microphone  
Silent mode  
GPRS active  
GPRS data transfer in progress  
Ongoing data call  
Ongoing call  
Home network  
Voicemail notification  
Missed call  
Divert all calls notification  
Getting to know your P910i  
21  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To insert the Memory Stick  
Memory Stick  
1. Open the cover for the  
Memory Sticks provide a convenient way of increasing the  
Memory Stick slot.  
storage space in your P910i. You can use both Memory Stick  
2. Insert the Memory Stick in the  
slot, with the connector side  
towards the back (see picture).  
Make sure it is securely  
inserted. A click should be  
heard.  
Duoand Memory Stick PRO Duo. Memory Sticks used in  
P800 or P900 can be used in P910i but you cannot use a P910i  
Memory Stick PRO Duoin P800 or P900. You can save  
pictures, video clips, music, and voice recordings as well as  
computer data and applications on a Memory Stick and use it to  
store or transfer the contents for many different purposes. These  
include:  
Note Insert the Memory Stick  
correctly to avoid damage to your P910i or the Memory Stick.  
Storing backup copies of important files.  
Storing media for personalizing your P910i.  
Storing media for use when composing MMS messages.  
Storing installation files for new applications.  
Transferring data between the P910i and a PC or Mac.  
Providing storage for third-party applications.  
The Memory Stick supplied with the P910i may or may not be a  
version that contains the lock function. Remember, you can  
overwrite existing files without the lock function.  
To remove the Memory Stick  
Press the edge of the Memory Stick using your fingernail or the  
stylus to release it. You hear a click as it jumps out of the slot.  
Note Be careful not to drop the Memory Stick when removing it.  
Renaming a Memory Stick  
You can rename a Memory Stick to give it a name that is  
meaningful to you. The name you set will be shown in the  
divider between internal and external storage in the folder menu.  
22  
Getting to know your P910i  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
See ‘Folders’ on page 29. There are two ways to rename a  
Memory Stick:  
Sharing data with other devices  
Your P910i uses the shorter Memory Stick variants, Memory  
Stick Duo and Memory Stick PRO Duo.  
Select  
See ‘Format disk’ on page 175.  
Select  
Control Panel > Other > Format disk and tap Rename.  
Memory Stick adapter  
File manager > File > Format disk and tap Rename  
.
Use the Memory Stick adapter when using your Memory Stick  
in a device equipped with a regular sized Memory Stick, for  
example a personal computer. Insert your Memory Stick  
according to the picture on the adapter.  
Renaming will not erase any data.  
Copying and moving data  
Warning! Do not insert a Memory Stick adapter without a  
Memory Stick into a Memory Stick slot. This may damage the  
product. Always insert the adapter in the slot with the connector  
end (marked with a triangle) first.  
For information on how to copy and move data to and from the  
Memory Stick, refer to ‘Folders’ on page 29.  
Formatting a Memory Stick  
The phone stops working during the formatting and it can take  
some time.  
Compatibility  
The P910i defines its own folder structure on a Memory Stick.  
Each application has its own set of folders. A folder created in  
one application is not visible in another.  
Note Do not remove a Memory Stick during the formatting. If  
removed it will be unusable  
Other devices must access the same folder structure to interact  
with the P910i files. If you are using a PC, this is easily done by  
browsing to the required folder on the Memory Stick.  
If you need to reformat a Memory Stick, select  
> Other > Format disk and tap Format, or select  
File > Format disk and tap Format. When you format a Memory  
Stick, you delete all the information on it, including any  
applications that you may have installed.  
Control Panel  
File manager >  
Memory Stick enabled devices which do not allow you to  
browse and manage a folder structure may not be able to share  
data directly with the applications in your P910i (for example,  
Memory Stick enabled digital cameras). However, the File  
Manager can access these files and move them into the correct  
folders for use by the applications. When your P910i is  
Getting to know your P910i  
23  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
connected to your PC, you also have access to the P910i folder  
structure as well as other Memory Stick content in My P910i  
.
Personal computer support  
Both PCs and Apple computers may be enabled for Memory  
Stick use via built-in Memory Stick slots, floppy disk adapters,  
PC card adapters, and Memory Stick enabled mouses. (Memory  
Stick adapter required.)  
For more information about Sony Memory Stick, visit  
www.memorystick.com.  
24  
Getting to know your P910i  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
C
D
The headset is connected to the P910i.  
Connecting the accessories  
Other accessories can be connected to the connector at the base of  
the P910i.  
E
C
E
A car holder can be connected to the antenna connector at the rear.  
Note Remove the plastic plug before connecting the P910i to the  
car holder.  
The wrist strap is threaded through  
the holes next to the connector at  
the bottom of the P910i.  
B
D
Services  
A
You need the following services to  
use the P910i functions:  
To use...  
You need...  
phone services  
text messaging (SMS)  
GSM subscription  
GSM subscription  
multimedia messaging (MMS) MMS account, GSM data subscription  
email  
email account, GSM data subscription  
Internet  
Internet account, WAP account (only  
for WAP 1.x services), GSM data  
subscription  
A
B
The travel charger is connected to the desk stand or to the P910i.  
Note The design of the charger will differ depending on the  
market.  
data communication  
GSM data subscription  
Please consult your network operator and Internet service  
provider about the services that are available to you.  
The USB connector from the desk stand is connected to a PC.  
Getting to know your P910i  
25  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
The Demo application can be launched also when the P910i is  
Applications - overview  
started without a SIM card inserted. When the P910i asks you to  
You can start applications in different ways. Select icons in the  
insert the SIM card, just press OK. If the flip is closed, open it.  
standby view (flip closed) and in the application picker (flip  
open) to start the most important ones. Select  
applications.  
to list all  
Phone  
This is the mobile phone application. When the flip is opened,  
select  
to start it.  
Demo application (Not in all phone versions)  
The Demo application shows some of the most common  
functions in your P910i. You can release this application to  
remove memory.  
Call list  
The call list displays the most recent calls, either outgoing,  
incoming or missed. In flip closed, press the Jog Dial or  
to call the selected entry. To view the call list when the flip is  
open, open Phone and tap the call list icon.  
You can uninstall the demo application and also reinstall it from  
the Content and Application CD. See ‘Removing applications from  
your P910i’ on page 142 for how to uninstall the demo  
application and ‘Installing applications on your P910i’ on  
page 140 for how to reinstall it.  
CommuniCorder  
For taking video clips and still pictures. In CommuniCorder  
view, the screen becomes a viewfinder. Press the  
CommuniCorder button or the Jog Dial to start recording or take  
a photo. Alternatively tap the red button at the bottom of the  
screen.  
To start the demo  
1. Select the Applications icon  
.
2. Select the Demo icon  
and the demo starts.  
Pictures (flip open only)  
To stop the demo  
Tap the screen or rotate the Jog Dial to stop the demo.  
The demo also stops when any other dialog is opened.  
Manages your pictures. You can take pictures with  
CommuniCorder, or receive them via email, Bluetooth wireless  
technology and infrared communication. Download via the  
Internet browser, or transfer them from your PC. With the image  
editor you can also edit your pictures.  
Note When the flip is open, an incoming text or MMS message  
will not stop the demo.  
26  
Getting to know your P910i  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Video (flip open only)  
Lunar Calendar (flip open only)  
You can look up the Lunar Calendar correspondence for a  
specified date ranging from January 1 1901 to December 31  
2100.  
Plays video clips. You can record video with CommuniCorder,  
download them from Internet or transfer them from your PC.  
You can stream video and audio from the Internet.  
Music player  
Tasks  
Plays music tracks and other audio files. You can download  
these from the Internet or transfer them from your PC. The  
player supports the most common sound formats. You can save  
music tracks on the Memory Stick.  
Keeps track of your tasks. Set due date, alarm, priority, and so  
on, for all your tasks and let your P910i remind you in time.  
PDF  
Quicksheet,  
only)  
Quickword,  
Pdf+ (flip open  
Internet (flip open only)  
Use it to view and edit various types of documents. Pdf-  
documents can not be edited.  
The Internet browser can access both Web and WAP pages. It  
can also download images, video clips, audio files, and Java  
applications.  
Jotter  
Displays a list of stored entries. In detailed view, the complete  
entry is displayed.  
Messages  
You can read, create, send and delete text (SMS), multimedia  
(MMS) and email messages in this view.  
Control panel (flip open only)  
Contains all settings that are system-wide and affect more than  
one application. This is the main view to use when initially  
setting up your P910i.  
Contacts  
Displays a list of your contacts. Select a contact to view  
associated contact data.  
Note Settings for Flight mode and P910i locks are located  
under Control panel > Device  
Calendar  
The Calendar view displays entries for the current day. Use the  
Jog Dial to get more information about a selected entry or to  
change days.  
Calculator (flip open only)  
A standard 10-digit calculator. You can add, subtract, multiply,  
divide, calculate square roots and percentages.  
Getting to know your P910i  
27  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Sound recorder  
GPRS data log (flip open only)  
You can use your P910i as a sound recorder.  
A list of GPRS Internet accounts. Open an account to view your  
logged GPRS traffic, including your costs. The P910i creates a  
new data log when a connection to an account is created.  
Time (flip open only)  
Shows time and date. You can set your current location and  
another. You can also set different alarms.  
Connections (flip closed only)  
Set the way you communicate with your PC or other devices.  
Select between infrared, Bluetooth wireless technology and  
cable. In the cable menu, you can also select whether the P910i  
synchronizes with a PC or acts as a wireless modem.  
File manager (flip open only)  
You can handle the content and organization of media, both in  
the P910i and on the Memory Stick.  
Storage Wizard (flip open only)  
Helps you to release memory. The icon  
bar when the memory is running short. Tap it to start the Storage  
Wizard.  
appears in the status  
Updating the software  
With Sony Ericsson Update Service you can keep your phone  
updated with the latest P910i software. See “Sony Ericsson  
Update Service” on page 142 for information about how to  
download the software from the Internet.  
Remote Sync (flip open only)  
Performs synchronization over the air. Using GPRS, the P910i  
can be continuously connected to the remote synchronization  
server. Remote Sync works equally well over CSD or HSCSD.  
General functions  
Online services  
i
Your service provider may offer different services, for example,  
weather forecasts, financial information or newsletters. Contact  
your service provider for more information.  
Application launcher views  
In flip open, the P910i can present the applications in two ways:  
List view (small icons appear in one column)  
Icon view (large icons appear in two columns)  
28  
Getting to know your P910i  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
In list view, the folder menu is used to organize your entries. In  
detail view, the folder menu allows you to change the folder of  
Folders are used to organize information, for example contacts,  
the current item.  
Folders  
jotter entries, or task lists. You might want to organize your  
contacts in business and personal folders.  
Using the folder menu  
In the applications that use folders you can see the folder menu  
to the right in the menu bar.  
Folders are also used when managing files of different types on  
your P910i and Memory Stick. You might want to move or copy  
sound files into a sound track folder to store on a Memory Stick.  
When a Memory Stick is available in the P910i, the folders on it  
are shown in the folder menu under the divider. If you rename  
the disk (see ‘Renaming a Memory Stick’ on page 22) the  
divider will show the new name.  
As you may notice, if you connect your P910i to a PC and view  
the contents of your P910i in My P910i, it is easier to get an  
overview of a folder and file structure on a large screen than on  
a handheld device. If you make it a habit to set up specific  
folders to suit your needs and use them to categorize all your  
information, working with it becomes easy.  
In list view, there is a super-folder called All, which, when  
selected, displays items from all folders (in  
Contacts, the All  
folder does not display the entries in the SIM phone book). All is  
the default value in list views and when an application is first  
launched.  
Each application has its own set of folders. A folder created in  
one application is not visible in another.  
Use the Edit Folders menu item to:  
For each application there is a default Unfiled folder. Since there  
is no way of seeing on your P910i, whether a file in an Unfiled  
folder is located on your P910i or on a Memory Stick, we  
recommend that you move files to your own folders as soon as  
possible.  
Rename a folder, or move a folder to or from the Memory  
Stick. Select the folder you want to move or rename, tap Edit  
type the name of the new folder, and choose a Location from  
,
the list. Tap Done  
To Add a new folder. Tap Add, enter a folder Name and choose  
Location from the list Tap Done  
.
Every item created in an application is always assigned to a  
single folder, by default the folder as displayed in the list view.  
a
.
.
Getting to know your P910i  
29  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To Delete a folder. Select the folder you want to delete and  
tap Delete. A folder can only be deleted if it is empty. Not all  
Using the File Manager, you can handle the content and  
folders can be deleted.  
Managing your files  
organization of media, both in the P910i and on the Memory  
Stick. See ‘File manager’ on page 132.  
To copy all the files in a folder to another folder  
You can also use the Storage manager in the Control Panel. See  
1. From within an application such as Pictures or Video, select a  
‘Storage manager’ on page 177.  
folder from the folder menu. From the application menu, first  
select Select all and then Copy pictures/Copy clips  
.
Zooming  
2. Select the destination Folder from the list and select Copy.  
You can change the size of the screen fonts. Choose between  
Small, Medium or Large. From the menu bar, tap Edit > Zoom.  
To move a file from one folder to another  
Open the file in detail view. In the folder menu, select the  
destination folder.  
Automatic saving  
When you work in an application and leave it, your work is  
automatically saved.  
To copy a file to another folder  
1. Open the file in detail view. In the folder menu, select the  
destination folder. Select Copy to in the main application  
menu; for example Music or Pictures  
.
Find  
2. Select the destination Folder from the list and tap Copy.  
The Find function searches through all the items stored in an  
application. The standard Find dialog contains a single text edit  
box with two buttons, Find and Cancel. Selecting Find starts the  
search, while Cancel closes the Find dialog.  
Tip To delete multiple files in an application you can use  
Storage manager. See ‘Deleting or copying general files’ on  
page 177.  
In some applications, for example Messages, Find may be more  
advanced:  
The size of each message is so large that you may want to  
restrict the search to the current message only.  
30  
Getting to know your P910i  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Folders are potentially more significant, so you may want to  
restrict the search to the current folder only.  
Multimedia message (using MMS): the P910i will create a  
new message with the item included as an attachment.  
Complete the message and tap Send  
.
Infrared: align the infrared port of the P910i with the infrared  
port of the other device. Select Send. Messages on screen will  
tell you when the information has been transferred.  
Sorting your files  
You can sort the files you have stored in your P910i. By sorting  
your files, you choose in which order you want the files to be  
displayed on the screen. You can choose between sorting by, for  
example type, size, date, or name.  
Bluetooth wireless technology: the P910i will search the  
local area for Bluetooth devices that are set to be visible.  
These will be presented in a list. Select a device to which the  
item is to be sent and select Send. Progress messages will tell  
you when the information has been transferred.  
Note Sort is not included in all applications.  
Sending and receiving items  
From many applications it is possible to exchange items like  
appointments, contacts and images.  
Tip The other devices must have Bluetooth wireless technology  
enabled. You can select Refresh to perform a new search if, for  
example, a destination device was not enabled at first.  
To send an item using Send as  
To handle items received in email and multimedia messages  
1. Enter the Send as menu in the specific application.  
1. Tap the notification icon  
, or  
2. Depending on the application and item, you can choose  
between the following transfer methods:  
open Messages and select MMS or an email inbox.  
2. Open the message.  
Text messageusing ( SMS): P910i will create a new text  
message. Add the mobile number of the recipient and tap  
3. Select the attachments tab.  
4. Select the required attachment. The attachment or a summary  
of the attachment will be displayed.  
Send  
.
Email: the P910i will create a new message with the item  
included as an attachment. Complete with address and  
5. Select Save to save the item. You may optionally display the  
received item within the related application.  
subject, and tap Send  
.
See ‘Messages’ on page 91 for more information.  
Getting to know your P910i  
31  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To receive beamed items  
The Detail view presents the title and text of a single topic.  
1. Ensure that infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology is  
activated and, for infrared, that the infrared ports are aligned.  
The Topics view allows you to select a topic, which opens the  
detail view and displays the selected topic.  
2. The received item will be notified by a dialog box listing the  
item(s) received. When using Bluetooth you will also be  
asked to accept or reject the connection.  
In many dialog boxes you can select the Help icon  
upper right corner.  
in the  
3. Select View to view the item. Select Done to save the item in  
the Beamed inbox in Messages. Select Delete to delete the  
item.  
Settings  
For settings that are application-specific, tap Edit > Preferences in  
the application menu bar. For generic settings, use Control panel  
.
Methods for storing data  
Your P910i can store data in different ways:  
Entering text  
Internal memory. Used for storing pictures, messages, music,  
applications, and so on.  
Entering text with the Flip closed  
With the flip closed, you use the keypad keys to enter text, for  
example, when writing a text message.  
Memory Stick (expansion memory).  
SIM card, for phone numbers and associated names. See  
‘Copying contacts to and from the SIM card’ on page 111.  
Text entry types  
Several other expansion-memory alternatives on the market.  
There are four text entry types when you enter latin characters:  
Getting help and setting zoom  
From the menu bar tap Edit > Help to get to the P910i help system  
Abc – latin characters; initial uppercase letter, the rest  
lowercase.  
or set the zoom level. The help system uses two views:  
123 – numeric entry only.  
ABC – latin characters; uppercase entry.  
abc – latin characters; lowercase entry.  
The Topics view shows all available topics, for example both  
specific application topics and general topics.  
32  
Getting to know your P910i  
           
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
There are three text entry types when you enter characters in  
Chinese:  
To input latin characters using T9 text input  
You can use T9 text input when writing, for example text  
messages and e-mail. The T9 text input method uses a built-in  
dictionary to recognise the most commonly used word for each  
sequence of key presses. This way, you press each key only  
once, even when the letter you want is not the first letter on the  
Stroke – Chinese characters; Stroke input.  
Pinyin – Chinese characters; Pinyin input.  
123 – numeric entry only.  
key. Press and hold  
to change input method.  
When you are editing text you can:  
The following example shows how to start writing a text.  
Press  
and select Text options > Language to select text  
1. Select, for example, Messages > Create SMS  
.
input language.  
2. For example, if you want to write the word ‘Jane’, press  
.
Press and hold  
to switch input language.  
Press  
and select Text options > Input type to select text  
During text entry, a suggestion list with word candidates are  
presented. The most frequently used word is highlighted.  
input type.  
Press  
to switch between the input types in text edit  
3. If the word is the word you want:  
mode.  
– Press  
or  
to accept and add a space.  
To input latin characters  
If the word is not the one you want:  
1. If required, select the desired latin text entry method.  
– Scroll with the Jog Dial up or down to view alternative  
2. Press a key to see a pre-edit box with the different characters  
on that key in the title area:  
words (candidates). Press  
word and add a space.  
or  
to accept the  
If the same key is pressed again, the next character in the pre-  
edit box will be selected.  
If you do not find the word you want:  
– Press to go to a list of options.  
3. Press the  
cursor. If continuously pressed, the  
characters and then whole words.  
key to delete the character to the left of the  
key deletes several  
– Select Text options > Spell word  
.
4. Press and hold  
to start T9 text input, or to close it.  
Getting to know your P910i  
33  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
– Edit the word using multitap text input and press  
.The word is added to the user dictionary. The next  
time you enter the word, it will appear as one of the  
alternative words.  
Copy all  
/
Paste, to copy all text to the clipboard, and for  
pasting the copied text to the place of the text cursor.  
To input Chinese characters  
Candidates  
area  
Note Multitap input only applies when Latin (English) is  
selected as input language.  
Jott  
4. Continue writing your message.  
Text  
area  
Press  
to enter a full stop. To enter other punctuation  
and use the Jog Dial.  
marks, press  
xian  
xiao  
zhan  
zhao  
If you press  
list of options:  
and select Text options when writing, you get a  
Phonetic  
list  
Spell word, to edit the entered word.  
My words, to view the user dictionary.  
Language, to change language.  
Jott  
Show suggestion list Hide suggestion list, to switch the  
/
xiao  
candidates window on and off.  
Elements  
area  
Use T9  
/
Use multitap, to switch between T9 text input and  
multitap text input.  
Add symbol, adds symbols and punctuation marks.  
Input type, changes the text input type,  
for latin input, between Abc, abc, ABC and 123  
for Chinese input, between Pinyin, Stroke and 123.  
1. If required, select the desired Chinese text entry method.  
34  
Getting to know your P910i  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
2. Input elements; the elements are shown to the right,  
candidates are shown on top. Refer to the mapping below.  
Continue inputting elements until the correct character is  
shown.  
Inserting symbols  
When you are editing text you can press  
on the application, choose Text options > Add symbol to select an  
item from the symbol selector table. Use the Jog Dial to select  
and, depending  
the row and press  
symbol and press  
. Then scroll within the row to select a  
. When the candidate area is invisible,  
3. Rotate the Jog Dial to select the correct character.  
4. Press the Jog Dial to confirm the correct character.  
press  
area.  
to make the symbol table display in the candidate  
Chinese key mapping  
Key  
1
Pinyin Stroke  
Entering text with the Flip open  
There are two ways of entering text with the Flip open:  
2
abc  
def  
ghi  
jkl  
Use the on-screen keyboard  
screen.  
located at the bottom of the  
3
4
Write directly on the screen using the stylus.  
5
6
mno  
pqrs  
tuv  
?
On-screen keyboard  
When you need to edit text, tap the keyboard icon in the status  
bar and then select characters. Tap Done when ready.  
7
8
9
wxyz  
You can choose between different types of keyboard layouts  
using the buttons at the bottom of the keyboard.  
To input Chinese punctuation  
The current input field is shown to the left in the top bar of the  
keyboard. Tap the arrows or rotate the Jog Dial to change the  
input field. The keyboard top bar also contains a drop-down  
1. Select Chinese input language, and select the desired Chinese  
text entry method.  
2. Press the  
button when no candidate area is shown.  
menu with Cut  
,
Copy and Paste. When copying or cutting, the text  
3. Rotate the Jog Dial to select the correct character.  
4. Press the Jog Dial to confirm the correct character.  
must be selected first.  
Getting to know your P910i  
35  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To input latin and numeric characters  
The more you specify the character – the more input you make –  
the fewer candidates will be left. If there are more candidates  
1. Select the button representing the characters to input:  
- Latin characters  
than can be displayed at once, use the next candidate  
and the  
previous candidate  
buttons to scroll.  
- Numeric characters  
2. Tap the keys on the keyboard; the text will be displayed  
simultaneously in the text area.  
Text  
area  
More characters become available if you tap the shift and  
caps keys.  
Candidates  
area  
Note The numeric keyboard is equipped with a button switching  
between full width  
and punctuations.  
and half width  
numerical characters  
Elements  
area  
Character  
components  
area  
To input Chinese characters  
The P910i has two Chinese input methods: Stroke and Pinyin.  
(
)
Both methods require that you create a character in two steps.  
Pinyin keyboard  
1. Select the button representing the input method:  
Stroke  
or Pinyin (the Stroke keyboard is shown by default).  
2. Tap one or more components of the character in the character  
component area. The selected components are shown in the  
element area, and a group of possible character candidates is  
shown in the candidates area.  
3. Tap the desired character in the candidates area. The  
character appears in the text area and the associated  
characters are shown in the candidates area.  
36  
Getting to know your P910i  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
The candidates bar at the bottom of the screen can be switched  
on  
or off  
by tapping the button in the lower right-hand  
Text  
area  
corner.  
Candidates  
area  
To switch between Chinese and latin input mode, tap the button  
at the left of the candidates bar, or write a stroke from down to  
up with the stylus.  
(
)
[
1
6
[
2
7
Elements  
area  
c
&
$
3
8
4 5  
9 0  
%
#
@
Mark text by putting the stylus on the text, wait a moment, and  
drag the stylus over the text.  
Character  
components  
area  
Stroke keyboard  
Handwriting recognition  
Handwriting recognition translates stylus gestures into letters,  
digits or other characters, and displays these characters as text.  
Handwriting recognition is only active in places where text can  
be input.  
Latin letters and Chinese characters are input in different input  
modes.  
The text mode screen is divided into an upper and a lower part  
divided by an arrow  
at the right edge. The position of the  
arrow will change according to the current input mode, in the  
middle when in latin input mode, and above the middle when in  
Chinese input mode.  
Getting to know your P910i  
37  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To input latin and numeric characters  
Latin characters  
1. If required, select the latin  
a
n
o
p
q
r
.
,
input button  
.
Jotter Edit  
Unfiled  
b
c
d
e
2. Write each letter in a  
single stroke, in different  
parts of the screen,  
depending on the desired  
letter:  
«
?
– Write lowercase letters  
below the arrow.  
&
@
s
f
– Write uppercase letters  
in line with the arrow.  
g
t
– Write numbers above  
the arrow.  
h
u
v
w
x
y
z
a
2
1
a
3. If required, select a letter  
in the candidates area.  
i
j
Note Most letters can be written in alternate styles, see tables  
below. The style itself does not matter when writing uppercase  
or lowercase, as it is the position of the screen that decides  
whether it will be uppercase or lowercase.  
1
2
k
l
m
Note Start each stroke at the dotted end.  
38  
Getting to know your P910i  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Numeric characters  
To input Chinese characters  
1. If required, select the  
(
0
1
8
9
+
-
Chinese input button  
.
Jotter Edit  
Unfiled  
)
2. Write each letter using one  
or more strokes, in  
2
3
4
5
6
different parts of the  
screen, depending on the  
desired letter:  
– Write Chinese  
characters below the  
arrow.  
/
.
\
– Write numbers above  
the arrow.  
3. Select a character in the  
candidates area.  
7
a
Note Start each stroke at the dotted end.  
4. The association characters  
are shown in the  
association area.  
Note It is important that the strokes are entered in the correct  
order, otherwise you may not get the character you want.  
Getting to know your P910i  
39  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
The stroke system has the 33 basic strokes in eight stroke  
categories. These are:  
Stroke Basic stroke Stroke name  
Down  
Character  
Stroke Basic stroke Stroke name  
Long Left Slope  
Straight Left Slope  
Short Left Slope  
Over  
Character  
Down-Hook  
Short Slope Down  
Over-Hook  
Over-Down  
Over Down-Hook  
Over-Left Slope  
Lift  
Dot  
Over-Down-Over-  
Left Slope  
Right Slope  
Over-Down-  
Curved Hook  
Down-Over  
Left Slope-Over  
Left Slope-Dot  
Down Hook  
Over-Down-Over-  
Down-Hook  
Over-Down-Over-  
Down  
Right Slope-Hook  
Over-Hook  
Curved Hook  
Down-Over  
Over-Down-Hook  
Over-Down-Over  
Over-Down-Lift  
Down Over-Hook  
Down Over-Left  
Slope  
Down Over-Down  
Hook  
Down Over-Down  
40  
Getting to know your P910i  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Chinese punctuation  
Extended characters  
To write symbols and characters that are not shown in these  
tables, please consult the Extended characters section of the  
Handwriting recognition help topic in your phone.  
Flip keyboard  
Located on the inside of the flip,  
the keyboard is similar in design  
to that of a standard computer  
keyboard.  
With the flip open you use the  
keyboard keys to enter text, for  
Note Start each stroke at the dotted end.  
example, when writing a text  
Numeric characters  
message. When you press a key,  
if there are additional characters  
associated with that key, then these will be shown in a pre-edit  
(
0
1
8
9
+
-
)
box in the title area:  
e ee e é ě è ē ê  
2
3
4
5
6
If the same key is pressed again, the next character in the pre-  
edit box will be selected. You can also use the Jog Dial to run  
through and select characters in the pre-edit box. (The pre-edit  
box will be displayed on screen for as long as you have the key  
depressed.) When the key is released, the highlighted character  
will be selected after approximately 1 second.  
/
.
\
Press  
to delete the character or spaces to the left of the  
7
cursor. Press and hold  
whole words.  
to delete several characters and then  
Note Start each stroke at the dotted end.  
Getting to know your P910i  
41  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Press the space key to enter a character space to the right of the  
cursor. Press and hold the space key to move the cursor forward  
by inserting 6 space characters at a time.  
Inserting symbols  
There are a number of ways to insert symbols with the P910i  
keyboard.  
Note When typing, press the keys one after another. Not, for  
Press the  
pre-edit box in the title area.  
or  
keys to show additional symbols in the  
CAPS  
example,  
and simultaneously.  
E
Use the  
to access the coloured symbols on the keys.  
Using the CAPS key  
Holding down the  
key for a short time will generate the  
CAPS  
The  
key is used to capitalize or 'caps-lock' characters on  
symbol selector table. To select a symbol use the Jog Dial by  
first scrolling through the rows, and select the row by  
pressing the Jog Dial inwards. Then use the Jog Dial to scroll  
within the row, and selecting the symbol by pressing the Jog  
Dial inwards.  
the keyboard.  
CAPS  
Press  
once followed by, for example, 'E' to write a  
capital letter. Any additional keys pressed will be displayed  
in lowercase.  
CAPS  
Press  
twice for caps-lock. Any additional keys pressed  
See “Flip settings” on page 175 how to specify which keyboard  
your P910i has.  
CAPS  
will be displayed in uppercase until  
remove caps-lock.  
is pressed again to  
Using the 123 key  
The key is used to access the coloured characters and  
numbers on the keyboard keys.  
P910i locks  
Use the SIM card lock and the device lock to protect your SIM  
card and your P910i from unauthorized use. Use the keylock to  
prevent the keys from being accidentally pressed.  
Press  
once followed by, for example,  
E
to type the  
number  
3. Any additional keys pressed will display the  
standard characters on the keys.  
Note You can usually make an emergency call without  
unlocking the P910i.  
Press  
twice to lock the coloured characters and  
numbers. Any additional keys pressed will type the coloured  
characters or numbers until  
is pressed again.  
42  
Getting to know your P910i  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
You cannot change the PUK code.  
SIM card lock  
The SIM card lock protects your SIM card, not the P910i,  
PIN2  
against unauthorized use. It is unlocked by the PIN and PUK  
Some functions on the SIM card can be protected by a  
codes which you receive from your service provider.  
secondary code feature. Some SIM cards do not have a PIN2  
lock.  
You can choose to have to unlock the SIM card every time you  
turn the P910i on, or to have the SIM card unlocked.  
The PIN2 lock cannot be deactivated. The code can be changed  
by a user who knows the old code.  
Your PIN (Personal Identification Number) code consists of  
four to eight digits. If you activate the SIM card lock, the P910i  
will ask for the PIN code every time you turn it on. You unlock  
the SIM card by entering the PIN code.  
Device lock  
The device lock protects your P910i and the data in it against  
unauthorized use.  
To activate the SIM card lock  
If the device lock is set to When SIM changed, it means that the  
P910i is not normally locked. However, if the SIM has been  
changed, the P910i asks you to enter the code to unlock the  
P910i before you can use it. This means that if someone steals  
your P910i and puts another SIM card into it, they will not be  
able to use it.  
1. Select  
2. Select a lock option.  
3. Select Done  
Control panel > Device > Locks.  
.
An error message informs you if a wrong PIN code has been  
entered. Usually, the SIM card will be blocked after three wrong  
attempts (the number of attempts is SIM-card dependent), and  
you need to enter the PUK code to unblock it.  
Note Your operator can block your SIM, if you report that your  
phone has been stolen.  
The PUK code consists of eight digits. When you have entered  
the right PUK code you must enter a new PIN code. You have  
ten attempts to enter the PUK code. If all ten attempts fail, the  
SIM card will be disabled and you need to contact your network  
operator.  
The device lock is not on when you buy your P910i. You can  
change the device lock code to any four to eight digit personal  
code.  
The default device lock code is 0000.  
Getting to know your P910i  
43  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To activate the device lock  
Automatic keylock  
1. Select  
2. Select a lock option.  
3. Select Done  
Control panel > Device > Locks.  
This option locks the keys on your P910i when the flip is closed.  
This is to protect the device if the keys are accidentally pressed.  
When this setting is active, the keypad will become  
.
automatically locked after a period of inactivity.  
You can choose to have the P910i locked every time you turn it  
on, locked when the SIM card has been changed, or unlocked.  
To activate or change the keylock  
Select  
Control panel > Device > Locks.  
It is also possible to use the device lock in combination with the  
screen saver. Just mark the checkbox  
Control panel > Device >  
To unlock the keys  
Display > Screen > Screen saver device lock to have the device lock  
Select  
>
.
activated when the screen saver goes on.  
Screen lock  
Note When using the screen saving device lock, make sure you  
have set the device lock to activate at Power on. Otherwise your  
P910i will be unprotected after Power on, until the screen saver  
goes on.  
This option locks the screen of your P910i. This is to protect the  
device if the screen is accidentally pressed in flip open mode or  
with the flip removed. When this setting is active, the screen  
will automatically become locked after a period of inactivity.  
Note You will not be able to browse the contents of your P910i  
from a PC, or synchronize items using the SyncStation, when the  
P910i device lock is enabled and active.  
To activate or change the screen lock  
1. Select  
> Settings > Screen > Automatic input lock.  
2. Select a lock time or Off  
.
Change code  
To change a code  
To lock the screen  
Select  
> Lock screen.  
1. Select  
Control panel > Device > Locks.  
To unlock the screen  
2. Select Change Codes.  
Push the Jog Dial Forwards > Inwards or Backwards > Inwards  
.
3. Select the code you want to change.  
4. First enter the old code, then the new one. (To ensure that you  
have typed the new code correctly you have to enter it twice.)  
44  
Getting to know your P910i  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Phone  
The Phone application is easy for the beginner, yet powerful for  
the advanced user. It can be used together with the other  
functions of the P910i, including applications from developers  
outside Sony Ericsson.  
Flight mode which enables the P910i to be used as a PDA in  
situations where radio transmitters may not be used. The  
GSM and Bluetooth transmitters (and receivers) are switched  
off.  
The phone includes useful features such as:  
With the flip closed you can access most of the functions using  
the Jog Dial and the keypad. More advanced tasks such as  
handling a conference calls or using other applications during a  
call are best handled with the flip open.  
Personalized ring types.  
Picture phone book.  
Quick access back to the entries in Contacts, making it easy  
to try an alternative number or send a message if the contact  
is unavailable or busy.  
Some options may be hidden or not available depending on your  
subscription.  
Voice-dialling – make a call by saying the contact’s name.  
Voice answer – an incoming call may be answered or sent a  
busy signal, using the words recorded for ‘answer’ and  
‘busy’.  
Call handling with the flip  
closed  
With the flip closed, you can use either the keypad or the Jog  
Dial to handle calls.  
Incoming call acceptance limit – specify those who should be  
able to reach you.  
Access to other applications while talking on the phone.  
Outgoing calls  
Office handsfree (speakerphone) which starts when you open  
the flip, making it easy to access applications such as  
Calendar and Jotter while talking.  
To make a call  
Enter the phone number on the keypad and press the Jog Dial or  
press  
.
Phone  
45  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Press  
delete all characters  
Press and hold  
Press and select Hide my number when you have  
entered the phone number, if you do not want to show your  
phone number to the party you are calling. Select Show my  
number, if you want to show it.  
to delete a typed character. Press and hold  
to  
To make a call using Contacts  
.
1. Select  
on the standby screen.  
to insert the international call prefix  
+.  
2. Press the Jog Dial or  
.
3. Scroll the list by rotating the Jog Dial and select a contact.  
4. Scroll by rotating the Jog Dial and select the desired number.  
5. Press the Jog Dial or  
.
For more information, see ‘Contacts’ on page 105.  
If the called party is busy, a dialog box appears from which you  
can set your P910i to automatically retry to connect.  
To make a call using voice control  
To make a call using Speed dial  
Speed dial is a fast way to call one of your special numbers. See  
‘Set up speed dial numbers’ on page 53.  
1. There are various ways to make a call using voice control.  
– Press and hold the Jog Dial.  
– Press and hold  
.
1. Press the key corresponding to the number of the speed dial  
contact.  
– Say the ‘Magic word’.  
– Press the call button on the headset.  
The speed dial name is shown above the  
key. If a  
When the Magic word function is active, the  
appears in the status bar.  
icon  
picture is attached to the speed dial, the picture is also shown.  
2. Press  
.
2. When you hear a short tone, say the voice command linked to  
the number you want to call. The P910i will connect you  
with the matching contact.  
To make a call using the Call list  
1. Select  
2. Press the Jog Dial or  
3. Scroll the list by rotating the Jog Dial and select an entry.  
4. Press the Jog Dial or  
on the standby screen.  
.
You can use voice control when the P910i is handheld, used  
with a handsfree set (car or portable), or with a Bluetooth  
wireless technology headset. Magic word cannot be used  
together with a Bluetooth wireless technology headset.  
.
46  
Phone  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Read more about this in Voice control’ on page 58.  
Press  
for the last dialled number.  
To make an emergency call  
Enter the emergency number on the keypad and press  
the Jog Dial.  
Incoming calls  
or  
When you receive a call, the name of the caller will be displayed  
if the calling party is in Contacts and the caller’s number is  
received from the network. If there is an associated picture it  
will also be shown in a small or large version. See ‘Incoming  
call picture’ on page 58.  
Usually, but not always, no SIM card or PIN code is required for  
emergency calls and you will be able to make the call as long as  
you have coverage from a GSM network. Check with your local  
provider to find out if emergency calls are possible without a  
SIM card, and which emergency call numbers are supported.  
You can select whether an ongoing program will remain active  
when you get an incoming call or if the Phone program shall  
interrupt it. For settings see “Incoming call behaviour” on page  
62.  
To end a call  
Press  
, or press the Jog Dial.  
Shortcuts  
To handle an incoming call  
You can press  
control, see Voice control’ on page 58.  
to answer the call or answer by voice  
Press and hold  
open, select Phone > Call voice mail  
to dial your voicemail. With the flip  
.
You can press  
ring signal.  
to reject a call and press  
to silence the  
See Voicemail’ on page 60 on how to set up voicemail.  
Press any of the keys from to followed by  
An incoming call will bring up the following options:  
to call a speed dial number.  
twice to call the last dialled number.  
Press and hold any of the keys from to  
your Contact list. Press again to reach the next letter.  
Additional key presses will add letters to your search.  
Press  
1 Answer – Answer the call.  
2 Send busy – Reject the call. The calling party will hear a  
to open  
busy tone and the call will be logged as a rejected call.  
3 Mute – Silence the ring signal. The calling party will not  
notice that you have silenced the call. The call will be logged  
as a missed call.  
Press any digit followed by  
in the SIM phone book.  
to reach a phone number  
Phone  
47  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
If a large picture of the caller fills the screen, you can press  
or use the Jog Dial to access the menu with the options  
above.  
Copy number – Copy a phone number to the clipboard.  
Paste number – Paste a copied number to be used for the next  
call.  
Speakerphone on/off You can use the P910i as a  
speakerphone. See ‘Speakerphone’ on page 52.  
Options during or directly after a call  
Use the Jog Dial to change the phone volume during a call.  
Applications – Open another application, and, for example,  
paste a copied phone number into a Jotter entry.  
Press  
to get a list of call handling options. The list will  
vary depending on the situation. Options that concern two or  
more active calls are described in ‘Handling two or more calls’  
on page 50.  
Press and hold  
Shortly press  
to mute the microphone during a call.  
again to reactivate the microphone.  
End call – End the active call.  
Call handling with the flip open  
New call/Hold call/Retrieve call – Put the active call on hold /  
retrieve the held call. This is useful if you want to make a  
new call during a call.  
You use the stylus and the virtual keypad to handle calls with the  
flip open.  
Add to contacts – Create a new Contacts entry if the phone  
number of the active call is known, and not already stored in  
Contacts.  
Outgoing calls  
To make a call  
Show contact – Display the entry in Contacts, if any, that  
corresponds to the phone number of the active call.  
1. Select  
opened.  
in the application picker. The Speed dial view is  
Transfer sound – Transfer the call to a Bluetooth wireless  
technology headset.  
2. Tap  
on the button bar.  
3. Enter the numbers with the virtual keypad and tap  
keypad, or press the Jog Dial inwards.  
on the  
Turn on/off tones You can send DTMF tones with the  
keypad, ‘Controlling tone-based services’ on page 54.  
Microphone mute on/off – Turn the microphone on or off.  
48  
Phone  
           
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To delete a typed character - tap  
. If you do not want to  
3. Select  
.
show your phone number to the party you are calling, select  
Phone > Hide my number after you have entered the digits.  
Select Show my number, if you want to show it.  
To make a call using the Contact list  
1. Select in the application picker.  
2. Select an entry by rotating the Jog Dial and pressing it  
inwards.  
If a call is not successfully connected, the P910i can be set to  
automatically retry to connect the call. When a retry is  
successful, the P910i alerts you with a single ring signal.  
3. Select a phone number by rotating the Jog Dial.  
4. Press the Jog Dial inwards.  
To make a call using Speed  
dial  
You can also tap the contact and/or number using the stylus.  
P
h
o
ne  
E
it  
d
Speed dial is a fast way to call  
one of your special numbers.  
See ‘Set up speed dial  
numbers’ on page 53. This is  
the default phone view.  
Sony Ericsson  
To make a call using voice control  
You use the voice control in the same way as with the flip  
closed. See“To make a call using voice control” on page 46.  
1
2
3
John  
4
Sandra  
5
Susan(w)  
6
To end a call  
Select End call, or press the Jog Dial.  
1. Select  
bar.  
on the button  
Mike  
7
Julia(h)  
8
Robert  
9
2. Use the Jog Dial or tap with  
the stylus to select an entry.  
Incoming calls  
When you receive a call, if the calling party is found in  
Contacts, the name of the caller will be displayed. If there is a  
picture, it will also be shown in a small or large version. See  
‘Incoming call picture’ on page 58.  
Elizabeth  
Empty  
Empty  
To make a call using the Call  
list  
1. Select  
bar.  
from the button  
To handle an incoming call  
2. Select an entry by rotating the Jog Dial and pressing it  
inwards. You can also tap the entry using the stylus.  
Use the screen buttons to select what to do.  
Answer – Answer the call.  
Phone  
49  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Send Busy – Reject the call. The calling party will hear a busy  
tone and the call will be logged as a rejected call.  
Paste number – Paste a copied number into a field  
Tap to make the following adjustments:  
Mute – Silence the ring signal. The calling party will not  
notice that you have silenced the call. The call will be logged  
as a missed call.  
Call volume – Adjust the volume in the phone. This is easier to  
do with the Jog Dial.  
Vibrating alert – Set when the vibrating alert should be active.  
You can also answer by voice control, see Voice control’ on  
page 58.  
Silent mode – All sounds, for example ring signals, will be  
turned off.  
Speaker phone – Activate the P910i as a speakerphone.  
Options during or after a call  
Mute microphone – Turn the microphone on or off.  
There are several options available, depending on the situation.  
You can access some of them using the screen buttons, by  
tapping the field with the calling party details, or on the menus.  
Options that concern two or more active calls are described in  
‘Handling two or more calls’ on page 50.  
During a call, you can make a second call, or answer an  
incoming call. The ongoing call is put on hold and the new call  
becomes active. The held call is shown with a grey background.  
End call – End the active call.  
New call/Hold call/Retrieve call – Put the active call on hold/  
If someone calls when a call is on hold, you will be asked if you  
want to release the held call and answer the incoming call.  
retrieve the held call.  
Add to contacts – Create a new Contacts entry. This option  
appears automatically after a call if the phone number of the  
call is known, and not already stored in Contacts. See ‘Add to  
contacts’ on page 59.  
When an active call is finished, you are asked to retrieve the  
held call. If you do not respond within a few seconds, the held  
call will also be finished.  
Show contact – Display the entry in Contacts, if any, that  
corresponds to the phone number of the active call.  
Copy number – Copy a phone number to the clipboard.  
50  
Phone  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To make and handle a new call during a call  
Conference calls  
Press  
to get a list of call  
A conference call can be started  
when you have an active call  
and a held call.  
P
h
o
Edit  
ne
handling options with the flip  
closed.  
P
h
o
ne  
E
it  
d
11:03  
11  
:
03  
1
2
3
John Smith  
(w)  
John Smith  
Tom Clark (w)  
Ann Jones (h)  
End active call – End the  
active call, the held call  
becomes active.  
The conference call view is  
automatically displayed  
whenever a party has been  
added to the conference.  
0123456789012(h)  
Switch calls – Switch  
between the active and  
held call.  
Anne Jones (w)  
End conference  
New call  
If an incoming call is answered  
during a conference call, the  
conference call will be put on  
hold.  
End active call  
Switch calls  
Start conference call / Add to  
conference call – Join the  
two calls for a conference  
call.  
Hide parties  
Start conference call  
Note Conference calls are only  
available if they are supported  
by your subscription.  
Transfer calls – Connect  
the held call to the active  
call and disconnect yourself from the call.  
To start a conference call  
With one active call and one held call, tap the Start conference call  
button, or select Phone > Start conference call from the menu.  
Release all – End both calls.  
Show contact – Display the entry in Contacts, if any, that  
corresponds to the phone number of the active call.  
To add a new conference party  
With the flip open, choose options by tapping the screen  
buttons, by tapping the field with the other party’s details, or  
selecting from the menus.  
1. During a conference call, tap New call and make a new call.  
2. Select Add to conference  
.
To manage a conference call  
Use the screen buttons:  
Phone  
51  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
End conference – End the conference for all parties.  
2. Press  
and select which calls in the list you want to  
display. The currently selected view is not shown as an  
option.  
Show / Hide parties – Switch between the standard call control  
view and conference call view.  
Tip With the flip closed you can press  
call list. Press twice to call the last number used in the P910i.  
once to view the  
To speak privately to a specific conference party  
Tap a party in the list to get the following options:  
To view the Call log with the flip open:  
Extract party – Make the selected party the active call, the rest  
of the parties will be put on hold.  
1. In the Phone application, select  
from the button bar.  
Release party – End the conference call for the selected party.  
2. Select a listed call to see more detailed information about it.  
To delete calls from the Call list  
Call list and call log  
To delete all calls, select Phone > Delete all calls.  
The Call list available with the flip closed shows calls made,  
To delete old calls, select Phone > Delete entries older than >  
Enter a date > Done  
received, rejected, or missed. with the last dialled call at top.  
To delete one call, open the detailed view on the call > Phone  
> Delete this entry.  
The Call log available with the flip opened keeps track of date,  
time, length, and cost information (if available) for each call. It  
shows all calls in order with the most recent call at the top.  
To view the Call list with the flip closed:  
Hints and smart functions  
1. Press  
.
2. Select Call list  
.
Speakerphone  
or  
If you open the flip during a call, the speakerphone function is  
activated and the volume will increase. This lets you continue  
the conversation while using other functions of the P910i.  
1. Select  
on the standby screen to open the Call list.  
Close the flip or tap  
to switch off the speakerphone.  
52  
Phone  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Note The speakerphone does not work while the phone is in  
To set a Speed dial number  
silent mode.  
1. Select  
from the button bar.  
Warning! The volume may be uncomfortably loud at the  
higher volume levels if the phone is close to your ear. Exposure  
to excessive volume may damage hearing.  
2. Select an empty position.  
3. Select the desired contact.  
4. Edit the name tag if desired.  
5. Select Done  
.
Silent mode  
In silent mode all audible ring and alarm signals are turned off.  
To edit or delete a Speed dial number  
1. Select on the button bar.  
When the flip is closed, press  
and select Turn on silent to  
put the phone in silent mode. Press  
and select Turn off  
2. Select Edit > Edit speed dial  
.
silent to turn off silent mode. When the flip is open, tap the  
sounds icon in the status bar to open a dialog where you can  
switch silent mode on or off.  
3. Select the contact to edit or delete.  
4. To change the name, enter the new name.  
To delete a contact, tap Delete.  
The vibrating alert still works in silent mode if not deactivated.  
5. Select Done  
.
Set up speed dial numbers  
Flight mode  
Speed dial is a fast way to call one of nine selected phone  
numbers. The view contains nine speed dial positions. Each  
speed dial entry consists of a picture or an icon, and a name or a  
number. The names, numbers and pictures shown in the Speed  
dial view are derived from the Contacts application, see  
‘Contacts’ on page 105. If the contact has a picture stored then  
this picture is used. A default icon is used if the contact does not  
have a stored picture.  
Note The phone and other communication functions must never  
be used in an aircraft unless otherwise instructed by the aircraft  
personnel. If the use of equipment without a radio transmitter is  
permitted, you can turn on the flight mode on the product. Doing  
so turns off the radio function.  
In flight mode the radio function is turned off so that it does not  
disturb sensitive equipment, for instance in an aeroplane or in a  
Phone  
53  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
hospital. You cannot make and receive calls, but most of the  
other functions in the P910i are available.  
Controlling tone-based services  
You can use your P910i to control phone banking services or  
other tone-based services that use DTMF (Dual Tone Multi  
Frequency).  
A Power menu asks you if you want to start the P910i in normal  
mode or flight mode each time you turn on the P910i. See  
‘Flight mode’ on page 157 on how to activate and deactivate  
this Power menu.  
The P910i provides different ways of sending tones during a  
call:  
Note You must set the Power menu before the flight.  
Pressing keypad keys during an active call.  
Including a tone sequence in the call setup. Enter the phone  
To use the Power menu  
number, then press and hold  
represented by the character  
to insert a pause,  
. Continue to enter your  
The Power menu has the following options:  
p
Phone on – Start the P910i in the normal way.  
Flight mode – Start the P910i in flight mode.  
Power off – Turn the P910i off.  
numbers for the tone-based code. Finally make the call by  
pressing  
.
To set flight mode on and off when Power menu is selected  
1. Press the On/Off button.  
2. On the Power menu, select the option you want.  
3. Press the Jog Dial,  
, or tap Done.  
To set flight mode on or off  
1. Select Control panel > Device > Flight mode.  
2. Select Flight mode now / Phone on now  
3. Tap Done  
.
.
54  
Phone  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Write digit sequences into  
a Contact entry for the  
service. Each digit  
Your P910i also recognises email addresses and URLs. If you  
select an email address you have almost the same possibilities as  
for the phone number. If you select an URL, your have the  
possibility to start the Internet browser which opens the  
corresponding Internet page.  
C
o
tactsEdit  
n
Unfiled  
Bank  
sequence to be sent as  
+4613244500 p1#1234567890  
p10#0#34#56789 balance (w)  
p30#1234#56 account 1 (w)  
p10#1#5678901 account 2 (w)  
p20#123456789 (w)  
tones must begin with  
p. A  
space will end the tone  
sequence and you can add  
a comment after the space.  
Once your call to the  
service has been  
Support for TTY  
Teletype (TTY) accessory, text phone, is an aid for people with  
speech impairments.  
established and you want  
to send one of your pre-  
programmed digit  
sequences, choose Show  
contact on the Phone menu  
to get back to the Contact  
card with the tone  
To use the TTY device together with the P910i  
1. Connect the TTY device to the accessories connector at the  
base of the P910i.  
2. In Phone, go to Edit > Preferences > TTY Accessory and select  
the check box to set the P910i into TTY mode.  
Refer to the TTY device user manual to find out how to use the  
device. It may be necessary to use an adapter between the TTY  
device and the P910i.  
sequences.  
Note You should not store any personal codes in your P910i, in  
case your phone is stolen or lost.  
You can still make normal calls with the P910i in TTY mode but  
other accessories such as handsfree will not work properly.  
Hyperlinks in Messaging and Jotter  
Do not open the flip during a TTY call. It will impair the quality  
of the connection.  
When you write text in Messaging and Jotter, your P910i  
interprets a number as a phone number. If you select that  
number, you have the possibility to, for example, call the  
number or send an SMS to it.  
Note Support for voice carry over (VCO) and hearing carry  
over (HCO) is handled through the TTY device and not through  
the phone.  
Phone  
55  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Support for ALS  
Corporate phone  
services in P910i  
Alternate line service (ALS) allows you to have two lines, and  
two phone numbers, in one subscription. If you are not  
subscribed to ALS, these dialogs and settings are hidden.  
PhoneEdit  
02:00  
?
The P910i can be used in a  
corporate environment like  
centrex, mobile centrex and  
corporate switchboards (PABX)  
equipped with a mobile  
extension facility (like Ericsson  
MD110 or Ericsson  
Corporate call  
John Smith  
Using ALS, you can select which line to use for outgoing calls.  
You can use the first line for any function, while the second line  
can be used for speech only.  
+442745551409 (w)  
End call  
New call  
Call back  
Intrude  
Incoming calls can be received at both lines at any time. The  
name of the line is shown and the ring signal defined for the line  
is used.  
BusinessPhone).  
Programmable feature  
buttons  
To select a line for outgoing calls  
More  
The preset line is shown by the icon in the status bar. If you want  
to use the other line:  
Used in a corporate  
environment, the P910i provides  
programmable feature buttons  
for easier use of corporate phone services. When, for example,  
you call someone who does not answer, you can press the button  
Call Back to have the corporate system call you back as soon as  
he is free.  
With the flip closed, press  
Switch to Line 2 depending on the previously preset line.  
With the flip open, tap and select Switch to Line 1 or Switch  
and select Switch to Line 1 or  
2
to Line 2 depending on the previously preset line.  
56  
Phone  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To report that you are busy, click  
(in standby mode) the PBX icon  
> Command to send a  
command to the PBX, such as In  
meeting until..., Course, or  
Business trip. The switchboard  
operator can then answer  
incoming callers that you are  
busy and when you will be back.  
All those commands that you  
used to dial to the corporate  
switch can now be replaced by a  
command button with clear text.  
When storing numbers in Contacts you should use the  
international number format, starting with . This allows you to  
use Contacts when you are outside the corporate telephony  
environment, when you are abroad, and when you are sending  
SMS or MMS messages.  
+
P
h
o
ne dit  
E
Commands  
Select command  
Meeting  
Incoming calls via the PBX may be routed to the P910i as well  
as to your desk phone, and you can answer in either telephone.  
When talking on the P910i, you may hand over the call to the  
desk phone by calling that phone, answering it and hanging up  
the P910i. You can also hand over a call from the desk phone to  
your P910i.  
Business trip  
Sick leave  
Corporate voicemail  
Lunch  
Gone for the day  
Vacation  
Course  
Configuring corporate phone service  
Cancel  
Your corporate phone administrator can program feature  
buttons, call routing, and commands in your phone via a  
settings file. Contact him to receive a user guide valid for the  
company and the configuration file, either via email or down  
load from the intranet.  
Using corporate phone  
service  
To place an internal call, dial an internal (short) number or an  
external (long) number. The phone sets up the call through the  
corporate switch, so that during the call you can utilize all  
corporate features like call back, interrogation, conference and  
switchboard operator services. When dialling an external  
number, you do not need to dial the external line prefix; it is  
added automatically.  
See “Corporate phone services” on page 61 on how to install  
corporate phone service.  
For more information on corporate telephony go to  
www.SonyEricsson.com/professionalsolutions  
Note When travelling abroad, use your phone as a normal GSM  
phone, entering Phone > Edit > Preferences> Calling cards and set  
the calling card to Call directly  
.
Phone  
57  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
magic word you can also press and hold the Jog Dial or press the  
handsfree set call button.  
Preferences  
In this menu you can change the settings for the phone options.  
Note Magic word is not supported with the Bluetooth headset/  
car kit in the P910i. Instead of magic word, push the button on  
the Bluetooth headset. After a confirmation tone, you should say  
the name.  
(Settings on your P910i that are system-wide and affect more  
than one application are made from the Control panel, see  
‘Control panel’ on page 155).  
To set the phone preferences  
Voice dialling – Select or unselect the checkbox.  
1. In the Phone program select Edit > Preferences.  
2. Select the item to set up.  
Magic word – Select the cases where you want to use the  
magic word when you use voice dialling. You must,  
however, record a magic word before you can select to use it.  
Using Magic word will increase battery drain.  
Incoming call picture  
Voice answer – Select or unselect the checkbox. Tap On if you  
want to answer or reject incoming calls by voice commands.  
You must first record voice commands for Answer and Busy.  
If an incoming caller has a picture stored in Contacts it will be  
shown on the screen. Select the checkbox to show a large  
version of the picture over the whole screen.  
Play caller name – If you have recorded a name for a person in  
Contacts, the P910i will tell you the person’s name when he  
or she calls you. This is useful when using your P910i  
together with a handsfree.  
Voice control  
The voice control option lets you manage calls using your voice.  
With Voice answer you can use words recorded for ‘answer’ and  
‘busy’ to answer or send a busy signal to an incoming call. With  
Voice dialling, you can make a call by saying the contact’s  
name.  
Voice commands – A list of the voice commands. A balloon  
means that a voice command is recorded for the command.  
To record a voice command  
A magic word ensures that the P910i will not call somebody  
whose name has just been mentioned by chance.  
1. Select one of the options, Magic word Answer, or Busy and tap  
,
Record  
.
Say the ‘magic word’ and then the name of the person you want  
to call, and the P910i will try to call the person. Instead of the  
58  
Phone  
           
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
2. Say the magic word, the answer command or the busy  
command after the tone.  
Answering mode – Select the option you want.  
Normal – Answer calls as normal.  
If you are recording a magic word, make sure that you  
choose a long unusual word, which can easily be  
distinguished from ordinary background speech.  
Any key – Press any key (except  
) on the keypad to  
answer.  
After 5 seconds – P910i answers automatically after five  
3. Select Play to check the quality of your recording.  
seconds.  
4. Select Done to exit.  
You can also select to use a Bluetooth headset as the preferred  
sound device. See ‘Pairing’ on page 145 for information on how  
to establish connection with the headset.  
You are advised to record voice commands in a quiet  
environment to maximize recognition.You also have to select  
the voice commands carefully, so it does not activate by mistake  
from environment sounds.  
Bluetooth  
Headset – Use the headset to manage incoming and  
outgoing calls.  
To record voice commands for individual contacts, see  
‘Creating and editing contacts’ on page 108.  
Divert calls  
You can divert incoming calls to another number if for any  
reason you are unable to answer them.  
Add to contacts  
This is a function for adding called and calling parties to  
Contacts. After a call has ended, if the phone number is not  
already stored in the Contacts, you are asked if you would like to  
add it.  
To divert calls  
1. Select the type of call you want to divert.  
2. Specify the phone number you want to divert to.  
Set the function On or Off  
.
3. Select Done  
.
Handsfree  
The settings are stored in the network. Tap Refresh to receive the  
Specify how to manage calls when the P910i is used with a  
handsfree kit connected.  
current settings.  
Tip Normally the data/fax options should not be changed.  
Phone  
59  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Off – The P910i sends a busy tone to the calling party.  
Accept calls  
You can specify who should be able to call you. All other callers  
will be rejected. Your options are:  
Restrict calls  
You can set restrictions for calls made from or to your P910i.  
You can, for example, protect it from being used for long-  
distance calls.  
All callers – Everybody can phone you.  
Listed callers only – Only people on the Accept callers list  
can phone you.  
Contacts – Only people in your Contacts address book can  
phone you.  
To restrict incoming calls  
1. Select the Incoming tab.  
2. Set restrictions for:  
– All incoming calls.  
Speed dial list – Only people in your Speed dial list can  
phone you.  
No one – No one can phone you. You can still receive  
messages such as SMS, MMS and email.  
– Incoming calls when roaming. Use this to avoid costs for  
incoming calls when travelling abroad.  
To add a contact to the Accepted list  
To restrict outgoing calls  
1. Select Add new.  
1. Select the Outgoing tab.  
2. Select Lookup and choose a contact, or write the name and  
2. Set restrictions for:  
number of the contact.  
– All outgoing calls.  
3. Select Done  
.
– Outgoing international calls.  
– Outgoing international calls except to your home country.  
Tap a contact on the list to remove it.  
Call waiting  
Use these settings to control how P910i handles incoming calls  
during an ongoing call.  
Voicemail  
For easy voicemail access, enter the number of your voicemail  
box.  
On You will be alerted by incoming calls.  
With the flip closed, press and hold  
to call this number.  
60  
Phone  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
With the flip open, select Phone > Call voice mail  
.
International prefix – Enter the international prefix used by  
the server.  
Note It is possible to include DTMF tones in the number. Insert  
before the tones.  
Set up tab:  
a
p
Sending order  
Number then code means that the P910i,  
after you have connected to the server, first sends the  
phone number you have entered, and then sends the  
verification number. Code then number means the opposite  
order.  
Calling cards  
Calling cards are used together with some phone services, which  
means that calls are set up via a calling card server. These  
settings specify how P910i handles calling cards. Most Calling  
card settings are protected by the Device lock, see ‘Device lock’  
on page 43.  
Delay for number/code – Set a time delay between the  
moment the calling card answers the call and the P910i  
starts sending tones.  
Calling card mode – Select how to use the selected calling  
card.  
Some international calling card services instruct their users to  
select a language by pressing a digit. When using the P910i  
calling card feature, you can insert such a digit in one of these  
places:  
Calling cards – A list of your calling cards.  
Selected card – Select which of your calling cards you  
want to use.  
Immediately after the access number, but preceded by a  
pause sign,  
Please consult your calling card supplier for more details.  
p.  
In the verification code.  
To create a new calling card  
Select New and enter the account information.  
In the phone number that you dial.  
Access tab:  
Corporate phone services  
You set up corporate phone services by importing a .pbx type  
settings file from your corporate IT-manager. This file can be  
received via email, stored on the Memory Stick or downloaded  
from Internet.  
Name – Enter a name for the calling card account.  
Access number – Enter the phone number of the calling  
card server.  
Verification code – Enter the verification code.  
Phone  
61  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Note Make sure the file is authentic before you import it.  
TTY Accessory  
Select the check box when you want to use the P910i together  
with a TTY accessory. Teletype (TTY) accessory, text phone, is  
an aid for deaf and speech-impaired people.  
To set up corporate phone services  
1. Place the file in the Document > Unfiled folder of the P910i or  
the Memory Stick.  
2. Select Edit > Preferences > Calling cards and enter your device  
AoC - Call meter settings  
Advice of Charge allows you to keep track of the cost of calls  
and to stop the P910i from making chargeable calls when a  
certain credit limit has been exceeded. The Advice of Charge  
option only appears in the list if it is supported by your current  
subscription.  
lock code.  
3. Tap Import  
.
4. Select the settings pbx file and tap Import  
.
5. Select the card among the imported cards in the Selected card  
control.  
6. Activate the card by setting the Calling Card Mode to either  
If the credit is limited, a Low credit warning is displayed, when  
there is approximately thirty seconds of credit left. When the  
credit runs out, Credit expired is displayed and ongoing,  
chargeable calls are stopped.  
Always use calling card or Prompt before call  
.
Incoming call behaviour  
When you answer a call when the flip is open the default  
behaviour is for the P910i to switch to the phone program.  
Select the check box if you prefer to stay in the ongoing  
program when you answer a call with the flip open.  
Please refer to the Help system for detailed information about  
the Call meter settings.  
Note PIN2 is required from your network operator for storing  
any changes you make to the Call meter settings.  
Not all networks provide charging information to the phone  
during a call. If your network provides this service and your  
subscription is for Advice of Charge Charging, you cannot make  
or receive any chargeable calls if you are roaming in a network  
that does not provide charging information.  
GPRS Alert  
If you make a new telephone call you can interrupt an ongoing  
GPRS session, for example, an incoming email. Select the check  
box to get a warning in such a case.  
62  
Phone  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
ALS settings (subscription dependent)  
Use Alternate Line Service to make calls on two lines with  
separate phone numbers. Some of the phone settings are used on  
a per line basis. In most cases, the settings displayed apply to the  
selected line. This is then indicated in the dialog title bar. In  
other cases, the lines correspond to separate settings or tabs in  
the dialogs.  
To set the line tags  
1. Select the Edit line tags dialog.  
2. Edit the names for line 1 and 2.  
3. Tap Done  
.
Phone  
63  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
MEDIA  
CommuniCorder  
With the built-in CommuniCorder camera you can record video  
clips and take pictures, view them on your phone screen and  
send them directly to friends or colleagues via multimedia  
messaging. You can also send the video clips and pictures you  
have saved in your P910i via messaging, infrared  
communication or Bluetooth wireless technology to, for  
example, a PC. It is also possible to exchange video clips and  
pictures between the P910i and the Web.  
Still camera  
Still camera  
Outdoor  
Set for outdoor light  
Message  
picture  
Set for picture size to be  
appended to messages  
Video camera Message  
video  
Set for video clips to be  
appended to messages  
Recording video clips  
The pictures in your P910i can be set as background, or they can  
be added to the contacts in your phone book. See ‘Personalizing  
your P910i’ on page 152 to find out more about using pictures.  
You can record a video clip with the flip open as well as closed.  
To record a video clip  
A button  
on the camera activates the  
1. Press the camera button  
application.  
to activate the CommuniCorder  
CommuniCorder application and acts as the  
shutter release when taking pictures.  
2. Rotate, if required, the Jog Dial to the Video mode or  
Message video if the video clip is to be sent in an MMS.  
The Jog Dial is used to set the  
CommuniCorder working mode:  
3. Press again to start recording. The status indicator flashes red  
during the recording.  
Video camera Video  
Automatic setting  
4. Press the Jog Dial to stop recording. The video clip is  
Still camera  
Still camera  
Still camera  
Auto  
Automatic setting  
automatically saved in Video  
.
Night  
Indoor  
Set for dark environment  
Set for indoor light  
You can also press the Jog Dial, or, when the flip is open, tap the  
capture button  
video clip.  
at the bottom of the screen to record a  
64  
CommuniCorder  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
By default the video clips you record are stored internally in the  
Delay timer  
Unfiled folder. Tap the folder menu to the right in the menu bar to  
CommuniCorder has a delay timer with a delay of 1-25 seconds.  
change the storage location to another location, for example, on  
The delay time is the time between the moment you activate the  
a Memory Stick. See ‘Folders’ on page 29 for more information  
shutter release and the moment when the recording starts.  
on using folders.  
To set the delay time  
To send a video clip you have just recorded in flip closed, select  
Send as MMS from the flip closed context menu. In flip open, tap  
1. Tap CommuniCorder > Preferences.  
.
2. Tap  
and set the desired delay time  
Note Most operators only accept video clips of 10 seconds  
length or 95 KB size.Use the Message video mode, or the Video  
limit setting in Video mode to limit the file size.  
To record video with delay timer  
1. Tap CommuniCorder > Delay timer.  
2. Press the camera button. The timer beeps for the set time and  
a timer icon is shown before the recording is started.  
Open the flip to access the full range of CommuniCorder  
settings. With the flip open, the CommuniCorder is activated by  
selecting  
>
.
When the delay timer is set, you will see the timer status icon  
.
To delete the last video clip  
3. Tap CommuniCorder > Delay timer to deactivate the timer.  
1. Select CommuniCorder > Delete clip  
.
2. Confirm the delete operation.  
Video status  
To delete a video clip you have just recorded in flip closed,  
Above the viewfinder, you will find the video status. Icons show  
whether the CommuniCorder is ready or busy, video quality, and  
audio quality. A number indicates how much time you have left.  
The calculation is based on the current settings plus available  
space on the storage location you have selected (internal or the  
Memory Stick).  
select Delete clip from the flip closed context menu.  
To manage video clips, tap  
to go directly to Video. See  
‘Video’ on page 73 for more information.  
CommuniCorder  
65  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To view the last picture  
Taking pictures  
1. Select CommuniCorder > View picture  
.
You can take a picture with the flip open as well as closed.  
2. Select Done to return.  
To take a picture  
To delete the last picture  
1. Press the camera button  
application.  
to activate the CommuniCorder  
1. Select CommuniCorder > Delete picture  
.
2. Select Delete to delete the picture.  
2. Rotate, if required, the Jog Dial to the desired mode.  
3. Press again to capture the image on the screen. The picture is  
To delete a picture you have just taken in flip closed, select  
automatically saved in Pictures  
.
Delete picture from the flip closed context menu.  
You can also press the Jog Dial, the  
flip is open, tap the capture button  
screen to take a picture.  
button, or when the  
at the bottom of the  
To manage or edit the picture, tap  
See also ‘Pictures and Image editor’ on page 69.  
to go directly to Pictures.  
Delay timer  
By default the pictures you take are stored internally in the  
Unfiled folder. Tap the folder menu to the right in the menu bar to  
change the storage location to another location, for example, on  
a Memory Stick. See ‘Folders’ on page 29 for more information  
on using folders.  
CommuniCorder has a delay timer with a delay of 1-25 seconds.  
The delay time is the time between the moment you activate the  
shutter release and the moment when the picture is taken.  
To set the delay time and the picture freeze time  
To send a picture you have just taken in flip closed, select Send  
as MMS from the flip closed context menu. In flip open, tap  
1. Tap CommuniCorder > Preferences.  
.
2. Tap  
and set the desired delay time.  
Open the flip to access the full range of CommuniCorder  
settings. With the flip open, you activate the CommuniCorder  
In this dialog box you can also set the picture freeze time. This  
specifies the time the picture stays unchanged in the screen after  
you have taken it.  
by selecting  
>
or pressing the camera button  
.
66  
CommuniCorder  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To take a picture with delay timer  
1. Select  
Note Depending on which mode you are using, some settings  
may be fixed (and not user adjustable).  
>
.
2. Tap CommuniCorder > Delay timer.  
To change preferences for the camera  
3. Press the camera button. The timer beeps for the set time and  
a timer icon is shown before the picture is taken.  
1. Tap CommuniCorder > Preferences  
.
2. Select the setting you want to change:  
Move the slider to change the brightness of the picture.  
Move the slider to change the contrast.  
When the delay timer is set, you will see the timer status icon  
.
4. Tap CommuniCorder > Delay timer to deactivate the timer.  
Turn the backlight On when the light behind the subject is  
brighter than the light in front of the subject.  
Image status  
Turn the flicker free function On to reduce the effects of  
flicker from, for example, fluorescent light.  
Above the viewfinder, you will find the image status. Icons  
show whether the CommuniCorder is ready or busy, delay timer  
status, picture size and picture quality. A number indicates how  
many pictures you have left. The calculation is based on the  
current settings plus available space on the storage location you  
have selected (internal or the Memory Stick).  
Choose white balance according to the lighting conditions  
you are in when taking the picture.  
For pictures, choose quality and size. The picture sizes,  
640x480, 320x240 and 160x120, are displayed in pixels.  
For video, choose quality for video and audio.  
Larger size and higher quality use more memory.  
Choose delay time and freeze time for the still camera, and  
delay time and Video limit for video.  
Camera settings  
You may want to change some of these settings if, for example  
you are taking a picture in daylight or in dark surroundings. You  
can also choose what resolution, size and quality, you want for  
the pictures you take.  
The icons in the upper right corner of the main view reflect the  
quality and size settings of the pictures and video clips and also  
the sound quality of video clips.  
CommuniCorder  
67  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To restore default CommuniCorder preferences  
1. Tap CommuniCorder > Preferences  
2. Tap Default  
3. Tap Yes  
.
.
.
68  
CommuniCorder  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Pictures and Image editor  
In Pictures you can manage all pictures saved in your P910i.  
The pictures can be taken using the CommuniCorder or received  
via Messages, Bluetooth wireless technology or infrared  
communication. They can also be downloaded via the browser  
or transferred from your PC via a cable. Your P910i supports  
JPEG, GIF, MBM, PNG, WBMP and BMP picture formats. In  
the Image editor you can perform basic editing of JPEG  
pictures.  
The thumbnail view gives an overview of all the pictures in your  
P910i while the list view shows a more compact list. At the  
bottom of the screen you can see how many pictures you have  
saved in the current folder.  
Tip To take a new picture, tap  
to go to the CommuniCorder  
.
Move among the pictures with the arrow buttons or Jog Dial.  
You can search for specific pictures and sort your pictures by  
name, date, size or type. Tap Edit to choose how to sort the  
pictures.  
Pictures  
P
i
c
t
uresEdit  
All  
You can send the pictures to  
others, add them to the contacts  
in your phone book, or use one as  
a background image or  
Detail view  
Tap a picture or select it with the Jog Dial to open it. Specify in  
Edit > Preferences if pictures should open in detail view or full  
screen view.  
screensaver.  
Brioney  
Mer de gla...  
In the detail view, you can rename your pictures and sort them  
into folders. This makes it easier for you to keep track of your  
pictures. Read more about organizing files in ‘Folders’ on  
page 29.  
Thumbnail and list  
views  
Tap  
and  
to change  
Wakeboard  
Mont Blanc  
between the thumbnail view and  
the list view.  
12 pictures (890Kb)  
Pictures and Image editor  
69  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Note Pictures with Forward lock cannot be sent further.  
To rename a picture  
P
i
c
t
uresEdit  
Photos  
1. Select Pictures > Rename picture  
.
Zooming pictures, widescreen and full  
screen  
2. Enter a picture name > Done  
.
Note Two or more pictures  
cannot have the same name in the  
same folder.  
From the detail view of the picture you can:  
Tap  
and  
to zoom in and out.  
Tap and drag the zoomed picture to view specific details in  
the picture.  
At the bottom of the screen you  
can see the picture information,  
for example, the name of the  
picture and the date the picture  
was taken.  
Tap a picture to display it over the whole screen. Tap it again  
to zoom in or zoom out. Press the Jog Dial backwards to  
return to the detail view.  
JPG-0002  
10:15am,21/06/04  
Rotate the Jog Dial to browse the pictures in widescreen  
view.  
Use  
move between the pictures in the  
current folder. takes you back to the thumbnail or list view.  
and  
or the Jog Dial to  
Moving, copying and deleting  
Sending and receiving pictures  
From the detail view of the picture you can:  
Select Pictures > Send as to send pictures to other phones or to a  
PC via multimedia messaging, IR or Bluetooth. See ‘Sending  
and receiving items’ on page 31. You can also save pictures that  
you have received via email and multimedia messages. See  
‘Incoming multimedia messages’ on page 95 and ‘Receiving  
attachments’ on page 99.  
Select a folder from the folders menu to move the picture to  
that folder (internal or on a Memory Stick). See ‘Folders’ on  
page 29 for more information.  
Select Pictures > Copy to to copy the picture to another folder  
(internal or on a Memory Stick).  
Select Pictures > Delete picture to delete it.  
Pictures in JPEG can also be imported/exported from/to a  
memory card.  
Select Pictures > Copy picture to copy the picture to a clipboard  
so that you can paste it into an item in another application.  
70  
Pictures and Image editor  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To copy, delete or move multiple pictures  
Editing pictures  
Editing is controlled from the toolbar below the picture. Tapping  
the tool icons will bring up a palette with choices:  
In the thumbnail and list views, select the check boxes beside  
the picture names. Then select Pictures > the command you  
want.  
Zoom in  
To copy and delete pictures you can also use the Storage  
Manager found in the Control panel. For more information,  
refer to ‘Folders’ on page 29.  
Zoom out  
Select colour Select one of the 16 colours  
Select pen  
Select one of the 4 pen sizes  
Image editor  
Select  
Select one of the tools:  
drawing tool - Pen for freehand drawing  
- Undo last action  
Using the Image editor, you  
can edit JPEG images.  
- Undo all actions  
Image editor Edit  
- Add text  
- Crop picture  
You can  
crop and resize the pictures  
- Resize picture  
Select rotation Select rotation – clockwise or anti-clockwise  
rotate them by 90° at a  
time  
You can save the edited image by selecting Image editor > Done  
.
write and draw on them,  
using different colours  
Copy and paste by selecting Edit > Copy and Edit > Paste. You can  
only copy and paste whole pictures.  
To start the Image editor  
From a picture opened in  
Pictures, select Edit > Edit  
If you make an error when editing the picture, you can undo the  
last change by Edit > Undo. You can also undo all actions since  
the picture was saved, by selecting Edit > Undo all  
.
picture  
.
To zoom in and out  
This is not available in all formats.  
Pictures and Image editor  
71  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Tap  
to zoom in.  
Note As soon as you tap outside the text item, the text is merged  
with the picture and cannot be edited or moved.  
Tap and drag the zoomed picture to view specific details in  
the picture.  
To crop a picture  
Tap  
to zoom out.  
1. Tap  
and select the cropping tool  
.
Select Edit > Zoom, and select between Fit to screen and Full  
A frame with 8 handles is placed around the picture.  
size  
.
2. Tap and drag one of the handles to define how the picture  
should be cropped.  
To draw on a picture  
1. If desired, tap  
2. If desired, tap  
3. Tap anywhere, except on the handles, to crop the picture.  
and select the desired colour.  
and select the desired pen size.  
and select the pen tool .  
To resize a picture  
3. Tap  
1. Tap  
and select the resizing tool  
.
4. Draw with the stylus on the picture.  
A frame with 4 handles is placed around the picture.  
2. Tap and drag one of the handles to define the new size of the  
picture.  
To add text to a picture  
1. Tap  
and select the text tool  
.
When you lift the stylus, the picture will be resized.  
2. Tap the place where the text should be put on the picture.  
3. Enter the text in the text field.  
4. If required, change the text properties, using the choices on  
the text, style and colours tabs.  
5. Tap Done to place the text on the picture.  
You can move the text on the picture by tapping and dragging  
on the text.  
You can return to the text editor by tapping on the text item.  
72  
Pictures and Image editor  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Video  
You can play video content that is recorded with the  
CommuniCorder, stored in your P910i or streamed. A video clip  
Video clips  
is a short video sequence. You can also play audio-only material  
which is encapsulated within an MPEG file or streamed. You  
can download video clips from an Internet site or transfer from a  
PC via a cable, or from a Memory Stick. You can also exchange  
video clips with other phones or PCs via infrared  
communication, Bluetooth wireless technology or multimedia  
messaging.  
Playing video clips  
The Video player opens in the list view. In this view, you get an  
overview of all the MPEG-4 video clips in your P910i. You can  
search for specific video clips, zoom the video clip names and  
sort them by name, date, or size. At the bottom of the screen you  
can see how many video clips you have saved in your P910i.  
You do not have to download a complete video clip to be able to  
view it. You can use the streaming function and view the video  
clip from the Web site where it is located. The video clip is  
played with only a short time delay.  
To view a video clip  
1. Select  
>
Video.  
2. Select a video clip in the list.  
The video player supports files in the MPEG-4 file format, for  
example name.mp4.  
Warning! The volume may be uncomfortably loud at the  
higher volume levels if the phone is close to your ear, or if you  
are using the stereo headset. Exposure to excessive volume  
levels may damage hearing.  
You can store video clips both internally and externally. You can  
also copy them between the internal memory and the Memory  
Stick. See ‘Folders’ on page 29.  
While a video clip plays, tap the screen to display the video clip  
in widescreen. Tap the screen again to go back. Specify the  
To adjust the volume  
Rotate the Jog Dial up to increase the volume, and down to  
decrease the volume.  
screen orientation in Edit > Preferences > Display  
.
Video  
73  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To copy, delete or move multiple video clips  
In this view you can send,  
rename, delete or move your  
video clips. Only the video  
clips saved in your P910i or  
on the Memory Stick (that is  
not streamed) can be  
In the list view, select the video clips you want to delete,  
move or copy, by selecting the check boxes beside the picture  
names. Then select Video > the command you want.  
V
i
d
e
o E
d
i
t
Sports  
Diving in the ocean  
To delete you can also use the Storage manager found in the  
Control panel. For more information, refer to ‘Folders’ on  
page 29.  
handled in the detail view.  
To rename a video clip  
To sort the video clips  
Select Edit and choose how you want to sort the video clips in  
the current folder.  
1. Select Video > Rename  
clip  
.
2. Enter a video clip name  
>
To record a clip using the CommuniCorder  
Done  
.
Press the camera button  
CommuniCorder application.  
view.  
or select  
to activate the  
Two or more video clips  
cannot have the same  
name.  
Playing  
0:09  
takes you back to the list  
Tip Use the Folder function  
to organize all your video clips.  
Managing video clips  
The detail view is intended for managing one clip at a time. You  
can play and pause the clip by tapping and , and stop by  
tapping  
To copy the current video clip to another folder, select Video >  
Copy to, then select a folder from the list.  
.
To view the video clip information  
The slider under the video area shows the current play position  
within the clip. Tap and drag the slider to move to another  
position.  
Select Video > Info  
.
To delete a video clip  
1. Select the video clip you want to delete.  
74  
Video  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
2. Select Video > Delete clips  
.
from the beginning as the rest of the packets are sent. The short  
delay at the start is to enable a small amount of data to be  
buffered.  
Saving video clips  
Your P910i can receive streaming multimedia.  
When you play video clips that you have received via email or  
multimedia messaging, or that you have downloaded to your  
P910i from the Web, the viewer detail view is automatically  
launched. From the viewer detail view you can then save the  
video clip to your P910i.  
Applications  
Streaming applications can be classified into on-demand and  
live applications.  
To save a video clip from another application  
Examples of on-demand applications are:  
1. Select the video clip you want to save.  
Streaming of music.  
2. Select Video > Save clip  
.
Streaming of news (video and audio).  
Streaming of movie trailers.  
3. Select the folder you want to save the video clip in > Save  
.
Streaming and download of video.  
Live streaming of music or video (broadcast).  
Sending and receiving video clips  
You can send and receive video clips using Video > Send as. See  
‘Sending and receiving items’ on page 31.  
How to connect to a streaming service  
If you know the URL of the streaming service:  
Streaming  
1. Select Video > Open location  
.
Streaming is a data transfer method making multimedia  
available in real-time. You can, for example, listen to audio and  
watch video almost at the same time as it is sent.  
2. Enter the URL of the streaming service.  
3. Tap Done  
If you do not know the URL of the streaming service:  
.
The data in the file is divided into small packets that are sent in a  
continuous flow, a stream.You can then begin viewing the file  
1. Open Internet and browse to the site where the service is.  
Video  
75  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
2. Select the item you want to play, for example a video.  
When you download a video clip to your P910i, it is saved in the  
download cache memory. When this memory is full, you have to  
empty it to be able to download new video clips to your P910i.  
The site server will download part of the video to the P910i  
buffer memory. This will take a short while. When the buffer  
memory is filled, the Video player will open the detail view,  
described above, and play the video seamlessly.  
To clear the download cache  
1. Select Edit > Preferences  
.
2. Select the Buffering tab.  
3. Select Clear Cache > Done  
.
Preferences  
When you view a video clip in full screen mode, you can select  
the orientation of the picture  
When you view a video clip from a Web site, you may have to  
set the proxy settings.  
To change the orientation of the picture in full screen mode  
To change the proxy settings  
1. Select Edit > Preferences  
.
1. Select Edit > Preferences  
.
2. Select the Display tab.  
2. Select the Proxy tab.  
3. Tap Left-handed or Right-handed orientation > Done  
.
If the proxy settings set in the control panel are to be used,  
tap Automatic configuration  
.
When you view a video clip from a Web site, using the  
streaming function, a media buffer is used to provide a steady  
flow of data. Increasing the size of the media buffer may  
improve the play-back of the video clip.  
If the manual settings are to be used, enter the relevant  
information.  
To change the media buffer size  
1. Select Edit > Preferences  
.
2. Select the Buffering tab.  
3. Select Custom setting and move the slider left or right > Done  
.
76  
Video  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Music player  
Your P910i has mobile music in the form of a stereo music  
player. With the music player you can listen to single music  
tracks or entire folders with tracks. You can download tracks to  
your P910i from a PC, the Internet or Memory Stick, and create  
different folders with tracks. Your P910i supports a number of  
different sound files, including the popular MP3 format. See  
‘Technical data’ on page 204 for more information on supported  
file types.  
If you navigate to the standby screen while you play music, you  
can press  
to pause. Press it again to play.  
Press  
to go back to the standby screen and launch another  
application. The music will still play. If this application requires  
dedicated audio, the playback will be paused.  
If you use the Music player a lot, it can be useful to create flip  
closed and flip open shortcuts to it. This way you can quickly  
access the Music player when you for example want to adjust  
the volume or change track folder. Refer to ‘Application  
shortcuts’ on page 155 for more information.  
You can store sound files both internally and on the Memory  
Stick. You can also copy them between the internal memory and  
the Memory Stick. See ‘Folders’ on page 29.  
Jog Dial control  
Rotate the Jog Dial to select a sound track. Press it inwards to  
play. Press it again to stop.  
When you receive a phone call while listening, the playback will  
be paused. When you end the call, you must navigate back to the  
Music application to restart playing.  
Tip To listen to more music you can store music on several  
To adjust the volume  
Memory Sticks and carry them with you.  
Rotate the Jog Dial up to increase the volume, and down to  
decrease the volume.  
Warning! The volume may be uncomfortably loud at the  
higher volume levels if the phone is close to your ear, or if you  
are using the stereo headset. Exposure to excessive volume  
levels may damage hearing.  
Playing sound files  
You can play MP3 music both in flip closed and in flip open. In  
flip closed, with the Jog Dial, select  
select the track you want to play. Press  
commands.  
, select Music player, and  
to find other  
Music player  
77  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To play a list randomly  
Track-folder view  
Select Music > Random  
.
This view is intended for  
playing entire folders with  
MP3 files. In the track-folder  
Music Edit  
All  
Sony Ericsson  
Managing sound files  
view you can  
Play,  
Pause, and  
Stop the  
0:00/3:35  
playback of the current folder,  
and see the duration of the  
track. Selecting a track and  
File list view  
In the file list view you can  
see how many tracks you  
have in the current folder.  
Tapping a file name will open  
the detail view, and allow you  
to play and manage that file.  
Music Edit  
All  
Aeroplane  
tapping  
will play the  
Aeroplane  
Beautiful Night  
Rooster  
Song for you  
Sony Ericsson theme  
Standing Still  
Beautiful Night  
Rooster  
selected track and all the  
following tracks in the folder.  
Use the slider to move  
forwards and backwards in  
the track. Select Music >  
Manage tracks to move to the  
file list view.  
Song for you  
Sony Ericsson theme  
Standing Still  
Stuck with You...  
Walk on  
To copy, delete or move  
multiple files, select the files  
you want to delete, move or  
copy, by selecting the check  
boxes beside the file names.  
Then select Music > the  
Loop and random  
With the loop function you can decide if you want to listen to  
the tracks in the current folder only once, or if you want to loop  
them until you manually stop the play-back. Select the random  
function to play the tracks randomly.  
command you want.  
8 tracks (6806 KB)  
To delete you can also use the  
Storage manager found in the  
Control panel. For more information, refer to ‘Folders’ on  
page 29.  
To loop a list  
Select Music > Loop  
.
Tap  
to move directly to the track-folder view.  
78  
Music player  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To delete a track from the P910i  
Detail view  
1. Select Music > Delete track  
.
The detail view is intended for managing one file at a time. Tap  
a file name to open the detail view. You can also play and pause  
2. Select Yes  
.
the file by tapping  
and  
.
Viewer  
In the detail view you can move tracks between your different  
folders using the folder function, or rename or delete them.  
If you play sound tracks remotely, for example music on an  
Internet site, a view similar to the detail view displays. The  
commands you find in this view are similar to those in the Detail  
view.  
The detail view displays the  
name of the track, the artist’s  
name, the album title, the  
track number, the copyright  
year, the sound file type and  
the duration of the track.  
Music Edit  
Aeroplane  
Artist:  
Unfiled  
Managing track folders  
In the track-folder view, the Music player plays the MP3 files of  
the selected folder. (With one exception, the All folder. If you  
select this folder, all MP3 files in all music folders will be  
played.) Using the folder function you can create new folders  
for sound tracks. You can create folders on the Memory Stick.  
You can also use several Memory Sticks for your music, for  
example.  
Album:  
Note The amount of  
information displayed  
depends on how much  
information is available on  
the sound file.  
Filename:  
Aeroplane  
Date and Size:  
6:02pm, 21/06/04  
2107KB  
Duration:  
3:35  
Move between the tracks in  
the current folder using the  
In any Music player view, you can create a new folder using the  
Edit Folders command in the folder menu. Then you move or  
copy your sound files to the new folder. You can add more  
folders with sounds as long as there is memory available. You  
can also sort the files using commands in the Edit menu.  
0:00  
and  
buttons.  
To rename a track  
1. Select Music > Rename track  
.
2. Enter a track name and tap Done  
.
Two or more tracks cannot have the same name.  
Music player  
79  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Note You can send WAV and AMR sound files in multimedia  
messages, and MP3 and AU sound files as attachments to  
multimedia messages.  
Preferences  
You can choose if you want all types of sound files to be  
displayed in the file list view, or if you want to display only a  
certain type of sound file.  
To select sound file types  
1. Select Edit > Preferences from the file list view.  
2. Check the boxes next to the sound files you want to include  
in the track folders and tap Done  
.
From the Content tab you can select the character set so that the  
content text is properly displayed.  
Saving sound files  
When you receive sound files in other applications, such as  
email and multimedia messages, you activate the viewer in your  
P910i. From the viewer you can then save the sound file  
to your P910i.  
To save a track from another application  
1. Tap the save (floppy disk) icon or select Music and tap Save  
.
2. Select the folder you want to save the track in and tap Save  
.
Sending and receiving sound files  
You can send and receive sound files using Send as. See  
‘Sending and receiving items’ on page 31.  
80  
Music player  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Internet  
You use  
Internet, the P910i browser, to:  
services it might be necessary to set up a WAP account in the  
Control panel as well. See ‘Getting started with Internet and  
Messages’ on page 179.  
Connect to the Internet to view and access Web and WAP  
pages.  
Receive and view Push messages from your WAP service  
provider.  
To start the browser Start the browser by:  
– pressing the Internet button.  
Download Java applications, images and audio.  
– selecting  
in the application picker.  
in the application  
– selecting  
launcher  
The browser can open Web pages that use Java script or frames,  
but functions that use Java script in the Web page will not work  
properly.  
.
– selecting a URL in another application.  
Note If required, you have to enter your username and  
password to log in to your Internet account.  
You can save bookmarks to viewed pages, to be able to access  
them easily. You can also save pages in the P910i for off-line  
viewing.  
While opening a page, the P910i might not receive incoming  
calls. However, when the page is properly opened you can  
receive a call and the page will still be open.  
The browser uses folders for categorising information. The  
folders used are bookmarks, saved pages, signed documents,  
and Push messages.  
The application has two views:  
Push messages is a service that gives you notifications about, for  
example, weather forecasts, sport results, and stock quotes. The  
notification is sent to you as a message that contains a WAP link  
to the site with the information you subscribe to.  
Browser view The base view of the application, where you can  
view Web and WAP pages.  
Bookmarks  
view  
A list view where you can save shortcuts:  
• to Web and WAP sites on the Internet  
• to locally stored pages  
Before you can use Internet, you need to set up an Internet  
account in the Control panel. If you intend to use certain WAP  
• to documents digitally signed by you.  
Internet  
81  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Open page – Enter the URL, or select from the drop-down  
list.  
Using the browser view  
The P910i can display the  
Internet page in normal view  
or full screen view. Use the  
Add to bookmarks – Enter the name of the bookmark and  
select the folder to save it in.  
0:03  
K
J
Save page – Enter the name of the page and select the  
folder to save it in.  
A
Internet button to change  
I
n
te  
r
ne  
t
E
dit  
between the views. In full  
screen view, press the Jog Dial  
forwards to display a menu  
with the most frequently used  
commands.  
Send as – Send the current URL via text or multimedia  
message, email, Infrared, or Bluetooth wireless  
technology.  
B
Find – Enter text and search for the text in the page.  
H
G
C
Find next – Search for the next occurrence of the search  
text.  
Sony Ericsson  
D
E
A
B
C
D
E
F
Internet menu.  
Scan text – Go to the area with the greatest amount of text.  
Back – Move back to the previously viewed page.  
Reload page – Reload the page.  
Edit menu.  
Go to the next page.  
Go to the previous page.  
F
Load all images – Load all images of the page.  
Page information – Show the page information.  
Bookmarks – Open the bookmark view.  
Shift between the browser view and the bookmarks view.  
Disconnect or get information about the connection.  
Go to the home page.  
G
H
J
Edit menu  
Stop loading the page.  
Cut – Cut out the marked information from an input field.  
A secure connection is established.  
Progress bar, shows the loading progress.  
Copy – Copy the marked information.  
K
Copy all – Copy all information on the page.  
Paste – Paste the copied text into the selected field.  
Full screen – Expand the browser view.  
Browser view options  
Internet menu  
Narrow layout – Adjust web page to screen width.  
82  
Internet  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Zoom – Select zoom level: Small, Medium or Large.  
Preferences – Set the preferences of the browser.  
Help – View help on Internet.  
Short forwards – In Normal view, change between the  
Internet and the Edit menus. In full screen view, show a  
menu with the most frequently used commands.  
Internet button  
Context-sensitive menus  
The context-sensitive menu is opened when you keep the stylus  
pressed on a link or a picture.  
Full screen – When you have opened an Internet page,  
press the Internet button to display the page in full screen.  
Normal browser view – Press the Internet button again to go  
Text link and picture link  
back.  
Open link – Open the active link.  
Link information – Show information on the link.  
Handles on the screen – Use the handles on the screen to scroll:  
Add to bookmarks – Add the active link URL to the  
Scroll up and down – Tap the handle to the right of the  
bookmark list.  
screen and drag it up or down.  
Scroll left and right – Tap the handle at the bottom of the  
screen and drag it to the left or to the right.  
Loaded picture (with or without link)  
Save image – Save the picture in the P910i.  
Jog Dial  
Copy image – Copy the picture to the clipboard.  
One hand navigation – In an open page, rotate the Jog Dial  
View image – View the picture adapted to the screen  
slowly to go to next link. Press the Jog Dial inwards to  
(enlarged or reduced).  
select the link.  
Send image as – Send the picture as text or multimedia  
message, email, infrared, or Bluetooth wireless  
technology.  
Scroll up and down – In an open page, rotate the Jog Dial  
fast to scroll up and down.  
Scan text function – Press the Jog Dial inwards (when no  
link is selected) to scan the page for text. The screen will  
navigate to the area with the greatest amount of text.  
Repeat the operation to find the next greatest area of text  
Not loaded picture (with or without link)  
Load image – Load the picture.  
Voice call link  
Call – Place a call according to the link.  
New SMS – Send an SMS message according to the link.  
Internet  
83  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
New MMS – Send an MMS message according to the link.  
2. Change the page name, if required, and select a folder to save  
it in.  
New contact – Create a contact with the link information.  
3. Select Done.  
Mail to link  
New email – Send an email according to the link.  
To create a bookmark to the open page  
New MMS – Send an MMS message according to the link.  
1. Select Internet > Add to bookmarks.  
New contact – Create a contact with the link information.  
2. Change the bookmark name, if required, and select a folder  
to save it in.  
Icons within a page  
Picture not loaded (can be loaded manually).  
3. Select Done.  
Damaged picture (not possible to load).  
To download and upload files, for example, applications  
When you select a link to a downloadable file, for example,  
applications, images and so on, information on the file is  
displayed.  
Note If images are not loaded, select the picture icons  
or select Internet > Load all images.  
To open a specific Web page  
Select Yes to start the download.  
1. Select Internet > Open page.  
When you select a link for uploading a file, a form for  
submitting the file is displayed.  
2. Enter the page URL or select a previously viewed page from  
the drop-down list.  
Select the file and select Yes to start the upload.  
3. Select Open.  
To view information on the open page  
1. Select Internet > Page information.  
To navigate through recently opened pages  
1. Select  
2. Select  
to move back to previously viewed pages.  
to move forwards again.  
2. Select the Content tab to view the page information.  
3. Select the Connection tab to view information on the  
connection.  
To save a page for off-line browsing  
4. Select the Certificates button to view the information on:  
1. Select Internet > Save page  
.
84  
Internet  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
– Server  
Using the bookmark view  
– User  
A
B
To disconnect from the Internet  
A
B
C
D
Folder menu.  
Edit menu.  
C
I
n
te  
r
ne  
t
E
dit  
All  
1. Select the connection icon (HSCSD/CSD  
in the status bar.  
or GPRS  
)
Search Internet  
My home page  
SonyEricsson  
News  
Internet menu.  
D
2. Select Disconnect from the pop-up menu  
Select an icon to view  
information on the bookmark.  
Webmail  
E
3. The dialog Do you want to disconnect, Yes/No appears.  
4. Select Yes  
Project home  
711 time table  
CSS fonts  
E
F
Checked bookmarks can be  
deleted from the Internet  
menu.  
.
WIM Access  
F
Select the bookmark text to  
open the page.  
When the browser requires access to the WIM card, for  
example, when establishing a secure connection, you have to  
enter the correct PIN. For more information, please contact your  
service provider or IT department.  
G
G
H
Select to go to the home page.  
H
Shift between browser and  
bookmarks views.  
Signing documents  
You have to enter the signing PIN each time a signing operation  
is going to be performed.  
Bookmark view options  
Internet menu  
Open page – Enter the URL, or select from the drop-down  
list.  
User authentication request  
Whenever a user authentication is requested, you have the  
possibility to either select a certificate and confirm the user  
authentication, to select to continue anonymously or to cancel  
the connection.  
New bookmark – Enter the URL, the name of the bookmark  
and select the folder to save it in.  
Delete – Delete the selected bookmark.  
Edit menu  
If Connect anonymously has been set, the browser will instead  
automatically try to connect anonymously.  
Edit – Edit the selected bookmark.  
Internet  
85  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Sort by date / name – Sort the entries. (Available for Push  
To view bookmark information  
messages and Signed documents only.)  
1. Select the check box of the preferred bookmark.  
Zoom – Select zoom level: Small, Medium or Large.  
Preferences – Set the preferences of the browser.  
Help – Open the help for Internet.  
2. Select Edit > Edit  
.
Information on the bookmark is shown. From the  
information screen you can:  
Folders menu  
– Edit the bookmark.  
All – Show all bookmarks in the list.  
– Delete the bookmark.  
Bookmarks – Show all bookmarks.  
– Send the bookmark as an email, SMS message, Bluetooth  
wireless technology, infrared, or MMS message.  
Saved pages – Show all saved pages.  
Unfiled – Show the bookmarks that are not in a folder.  
To delete several bookmarks  
Edit folders – Categorise your bookmarks in folders  
(business, personal and so on).  
1. Select the check box of the bookmarks to delete.  
2. Select Internet > Delete.  
The contents in the Folders menu can change depending on the  
pages and bookmarks stored in the P910i.  
3. Select Yes to confirm.  
Icons  
Bookmark  
Preferences  
Saved page  
The browser is initially set up to work, but you have to set up  
your own account. A simple way of setting up an Internet  
account is to use the Web phone setup-message generator on  
www.SonyEricsson.com. See also ‘Internet accounts’ on  
page 163 for more information.  
Push message from the WAP service provider  
Signed document  
To open a bookmark  
The easiest way to set up Internet and WAP accounts is to ask  
your Internet service provider to send you an auto setup message  
1. Select the bookmark text.  
2. The bookmarked item is opened.  
86  
Internet  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
containing the required setup information. The accounts will  
then be set up automatically on your P910i. To guarantee the  
integrity of the settings, a PIN may be used.  
– Select if images should be loaded. If images are not  
loaded, the page will be loaded faster. Non-loaded images  
can be loaded manually when viewing the page.  
– Select if sounds should be played when the page is  
opened.  
For security reasons, some WAP pages and services, for  
example on-line banking, can only be accessed from a particular  
WAP account. See ‘WAP accounts’ on page 173 for more  
information.  
– Select if animations should be played when the page is  
opened.  
Note Proxy settings for MMS messages, and for a WAP gateway  
should be set in the WAP accounts. Other proxy settings should  
be set in the Internet accounts.  
Security settings  
– Select if you want to save signed documents.  
– Select if you want to connect without giving away your  
identity.  
To set up the browser  
– Select if you want to connect using the WIM card.  
– Select if you want to allow cookies.  
1. Select Edit > Preferences  
.
2. Perform the setup according to the following:  
Advanced settings  
Basic settings  
– Select if you want to be able to receive messages from  
your WAP service provider.  
– Enter the URL for the page to be shown when the browser  
is started from the Internet button; either a page stored in  
the P910i or a page on the Internet.  
– Select if you want to automatically open the URL in WAP  
Push messages.  
– Select the WAP account to be used when the home page is  
loaded. The accounts are set up in the control panel.  
– Select if you want to remove out-of-date messages  
automatically.  
– Select if a new page should be displayed over the whole  
screen.  
– Select a sound that notifies you when a Push message  
arrives.  
– Select if you want to use a vertical scroll bar to scroll the  
pages up and down. Otherwise you can use the Jog Dial.  
Internet  
87  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
– Set the size of the cache memory. The cache is the part of  
the memory where viewed pages are stored. Stored pages  
will load faster when you visit them again.  
– Select Clear history to empty the list of pages visited and  
cookies stored.  
– Select Clear cache to empty the cache memory.  
88  
Internet  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Games  
There are two pre-installed games in your P910i. Traditional  
Played – Select if you want to play locally against your  
Chess and the card game Solitaire.  
P910i or against another P910i user.  
More games are available on the Content and Application CD in  
your original P910i box. You can also install games from other  
developers, see ‘Installing applications’ on page 140.  
3. Tap Play to start the game.  
To play Chess  
1. Select the piece you want to move.  
The square where it is standing will now be marked with a  
triangle.  
Chess  
You can play Chess against the P910i, or against another P910i  
user via SMS.  
2. Select the square to which you want to move the piece and  
the piece will move to it.  
Please read the help texts for detailed information on how to set  
up and play Chess.  
Closing the flip closes the game temporarily and saves the  
session status. Your opponent will be sent an end-of-game text  
message.  
To start a new game  
1. Select Chess > New game to initiate a game.  
Solitaire  
2. Enter details as desired in the New game dialog. You can  
return to these details later.  
Solitaire is a card game played with a standard deck of 52 cards  
and up to 4 Jokers.  
Name – Give the game a name so you can return to it later  
if you have to interrupt it.  
The purpose of Solitaire is to remove all the cards from the piles  
to the layout card while scoring as many points as possible.  
Notes – Write a note about the game.  
You play – Choose to play white or black.  
Against – Select the level of your opponent.  
Games  
89  
           
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Points are awarded for playing pile cards and bonus points are  
awarded for unbroken, ascending or descending runs of four or  
more rank cards.  
The game will either start with a new game or with the layout  
for an earlier, interrupted game. (the game data is saved on  
return to desktop, when the flip is closed or when the battery  
is low).  
When you cannot play any more cards and cards still remain in  
the piles, the game is over. If all the pile cards are removed,  
bonus points are awarded and the hand is won. You are then  
challenged to play a Higher/Lower game to acquire more bonus  
points. After the challenge, the game continues and a new hand  
is dealt with one less Joker.  
2. Select the card you want to move and it will be higlighted.  
3. Select the card to which you would like to move the  
higlighted card.  
To restart the game during a game  
Select Solitaire > New game.  
Rules  
To undo/redo a move  
Select Edit > Undo move / Redo move.  
When the game starts, 35 cards are dealt from the deck into  
7 piles of 5 cards. A further card is then dealt face up from the  
layout card.  
Cards can only be played from the bottom of the piles.  
To play a pile card it must have a face value of one more or  
one less than the layout card.  
Aces are low and may not be played onto kings. Jokers can  
be played onto any card and any card can be played onto a  
joker.  
Play Solitaire  
Solitaire is only available with the flip open.  
1. Select the icon for Solitaire.  
90  
Games  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
BUSINESS  
Messages  
With  
types of messages:  
Messages you can create, send, and receive different  
– Files for exchanging electronic business cards (vCard)  
and calendar information (vCal).  
Auto setup files for OTA (Over The Air) configuration.  
SMS (Short Message Service) messages are text  
messages sent and received via the network operator's  
message centre. When a text message has pictures,  
sounds, melodies and animations inserted, it becomes  
an EMS (Enhanced Message Service).  
Beamed messages. These are files received via infrared or  
Bluetooth wireless technology.  
The different types of messages are handled by separate  
messaging accounts. Select  
Messaging accounts to see the details of the messaging accounts  
Control panel > Connections >  
MMS (Multimedia Message Service) messages.  
A multimedia message can contain text, graphics,  
animations, photographic images, audio clips and ring  
melodies.  
on your P910i.  
You can have any number of email accounts - a typical  
configuration will be one business and one personal account.  
When you set up a synchronization with your PC, an account for  
synchronized email is automatically created on your P910i.  
Email messages. Your P910i mail client supports POP3  
and IMAP4 mail servers, MIME attachments and  
SMTP for sending mail.  
You also use Messages to receive:  
With the flip closed, text and multimedia messages can be sent  
and received using the Jog Dial and the keypad. More advanced  
tasks are, however, best handled with the flip open.  
Area Information messages.These are text messages  
broadcast to all subscribers in a network area, for example  
local road reports or local taxi phone numbers. (Area  
Information services are not available from all operators).  
Before using Messages  
Before you can send and receive any messages (except for SMS)  
you need to set up the necessary accounts.  
BIO (Bearer Independent Object) messages. There are  
different types of messages:  
– Setup (email, Internet, WAP accounts).  
– Email notifications.  
Messages  
91  
           
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
A simple way of setting up an Internet, email, or MMS account  
is to ask your service provider to send you a message that  
contains the required information to create an account  
automatically on your P910i. You can also use the Web phone  
setup-message generator on www.SonyEricsson.com. Received  
auto-setup messages are stored in the Auto setup inbox.  
To save an email message to Outbox  
1. After composing your message, select Send.  
2. Select Save to outbox.  
Messages that you send from an email synchronization account  
are always saved to Outbox and sent from your PC after your  
next synchronization.  
See ‘Getting started with Internet and Messages’ on page 179.  
Draft  
Folders in Messages  
Draft contains messages that are not ready to be sent.  
Messaging accounts can have the following folders: Inbox  
,
To store a new message in Draft  
Outbox Draft, Sent, and folders you can create yourself, local  
,
Create the message and exit without selecting Send  
.
folders. You can also subscribe to folders based on a server  
(remote folders), if you have selected IMAP for your email  
account.  
To move a message from Outbox to Draft  
Open the Outbox message list, select the message, and select  
Message > Move to draft  
.
Inbox  
Inbox contains received messages. You can reply to, forward,  
and delete messages, but not edit them.  
Sent  
Sent contains messages you have sent from your P910i.  
Tip Regularly delete old messages from your Sent folder,  
especially those with attachments, to clear storage space.  
Outbox  
Outbox contains messages that are ready to be sent. If you are  
creating several messages, and not using GPRS, you can reduce  
connection time by saving them to Outbox and then connect and  
send them all at the same time.  
92  
Messages  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Local folders  
The accounts in Messages  
When you open Messages, a list of your accounts appears.  
To create a new folder  
1. From the folder menu, select Edit folders  
2. Tap Add  
3. Name the folder.  
4. Tap Done  
.
The top items in the list, Create SMS, and Create MMS, are  
shortcuts for directly creating new messages.  
.
An asterisk next to an account indicates that a message has  
arrived since you last opened the accounts inbox.  
.
Remote folders  
Handling text messages  
If you have selected connection type IMAP for your email  
account, you can subscribe to remote folders on your email  
server. (To select connection type, see “Email account basic tab  
settings” on page 168.) By default you subscribe to an Inbox  
folder.  
A text message is sent via SMS (Short Message Service). It can  
contain up to 160 characters (70 characters if you use non-Latin  
characters). If you create a longer message it will be sent as two  
(or more) separate messages (concatenated), but will usually be  
received as one message. If you add pictures, sounds and other  
items to your message it becomes an EMS message.  
Note If you change connection type, your Inbox will be emptied.  
Use the Get&send command to download your messages again.  
See “Get and send” on page 102.  
Text messages can be sent to one or more people (not more than  
thirty, we recommend), and you can request a delivery report  
when your text messages have been delivered to the recipients.  
The delivery report arrives on your P910i as a text message.  
To subscribe to a new remote folder  
1. From the folder menu, select Subscribe  
2. Select the check box for the folders you wish to subscribe to.  
3. Tap Done  
.
If you leave the message before sending it, it will automatically  
be stored in the Draft folder (unless you edit a message which  
was already located in Outbox).  
.
The new folders are shown in the folder list. Your subscribed  
folders will be shown in a flat structure, that is, subfolders will  
be shown on the same level as main folders. Use the Get&send  
command to download messages from the folders you have  
subscribed to.  
Messages  
93  
           
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
a
Tip To enter several addresses manually (without using  
Contacts) in a text message, multimedia message or in an email:  
enter a comma between each address.  
Tap  
Tap  
to write bold text.  
a
to change the size of the text you write.  
To format the text in the message using EMS features  
1. Highlight the text you want to format.  
2. Tap Edit > Format text.  
To write and send a text message  
1. In  
Messages select Create SMS. (You can also select SMS >  
tap Message > New.)  
3. Tap General tab to change the Alignment and Font  
.
2. Enter the recipient’s number or select To and select recipient  
4. Tap Style tab to check the character style check boxes: bold,  
or recipients from your contact list and select Done.  
italic, underline, or strike through.  
3. Write your message.  
5. Select Done  
.
4. Go to the address tab  
delivery report or not.  
and specify whether you want a  
a
You can also use the icons  
and  
described above.  
a
5. Tap Send.  
To save a received EMS item  
To add an EMS item to your text message  
Use the icons at the bottom of the screen to select the type of  
item you wish to add.  
1. Tap the item.  
2. Select Edit > Save object  
.
Tap  
Tap  
to insert one of the smilies that appear.  
Handling multimedia messages  
to insert a picture or an animation. The pictures and  
animations last used appear.  
MMS (Multimedia Messaging Service) messages can include  
pictures, animations and sound, organized like a slide  
presentation with time-based control of the playback.  
Composing a multimedia message is like building a small slide  
presentation. A typical page will consist of a picture, some text  
and sound. Refer to Technical data, section ‘MMS’ on page 206  
for supported file types that you can add.  
– Tap More to get more pictures and animations to use.  
– Tap New to draw a picture of your own.  
Tap  
to insert a sound. The sounds last used appear.  
– Tap More to get more sounds to use.  
94  
Messages  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
You can take a picture with the CommuniCorder and send it as a  
multimedia message using the Send as command from Pictures.  
Multimedia messages can be sent to a mobile phone or an email  
account.  
To forward an MMS  
1. Open the message.  
2. From the Message menu, select Forward  
.
3. On the  
mobile number or email address.  
4. Select Send  
address tab, select To and enter the recipient’s  
How a recipient receives an MMS you send depends on your  
MMS service and how the receiving phone complies to MMS  
specifications. Phones can, for example, only receive pictures of  
a maximum size, video and sound.  
.
To store a received MMS item, for example a picture  
1. Open the message.  
Your P910i can help you to create messages which conform to  
standard and therefore are more likely to reach recipients. Set  
the Content alert to warn or restrict you. See “MMS Advanced  
settings tabs” on page 171.  
2. Select the picture you want to save.  
3. Select Save picture or select Edit > Save picture  
.
4. Select the storage location.  
Tip To enter several addresses manually (without using  
Contacts) in a text message, multimedia message or in an email:  
enter a comma between each address.  
5. Select Save  
.
You can store items both internally and externally. You can also  
copy them between the internal memory and the Memory Stick.  
See ‘Folders’ on page 29.  
Incoming multimedia messages  
To play a received multimedia message  
Creating and sending multimedia messages  
You can create multimedia messages in the P910i but you can  
Open the MMS inbox and select the new message.  
also use the MMS editor on the Content and Application CD.  
The first time a multimedia message is opened it plays  
automatically. The next time you open the message you can  
play it by pressing the Play Button (flip open) or by choosing  
Play from the menu (flip closed).  
Messages  
95  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To create a new multimedia message  
1. In  
Message > New. or open an existing message and select  
6. Select Edit > Background colour to give the message a  
background colour.  
Messages select Create MMS. (You can also select MMS >  
7. Tap  
to add a new page to the multimedia message in  
Message > New ).  
which you can insert items.  
2. From the Select template dialog, tap the name of the template  
you want and tap Select. The Blank template will open a blank  
message.  
8. Select Edit > Page order to change the page order in the  
message.  
To enter the recipient’s phone number  
3. The first page of the new  
message is now displayed.  
1. Select the  
address tab.  
M
e
s
sag  
e
Edit  
Draft  
Select an item from the  
menu that appears.  
2. Select To and select the recipient from Contacts.  
or:  
2
1/1  
Tap  
if it does not open  
automatically If you  
to open the menu  
Select the line beside To and enter the recipient’s mobile  
number or email address.  
CommuniCorder  
Add video  
.
To insert an attachment  
select Add scribble the  
Image editor presents a  
white background onto  
which manual graphics  
can be added. The Image  
Editor includes controls  
for pen, crop, colour,  
scale, rotate and pen  
width.  
Add picture  
Add scribble  
Add text  
1. While creating your multimedia message, select the  
attachment tab, select Add  
.
Add sound  
2. Select the type of attachment you want to add.  
3. Select the attachment.  
Add recording  
Paste  
To send the multimedia message  
Send  
Tap Send  
.
4. Tap  
audio or voice to the page. Tap the page to return to it.  
5. Tap if you want to change the time this page should be  
shown. Default time is 5 seconds.  
again to add text,  
Preferences to a multimedia message  
Select Edit > Preferences to set the preferences to a multimedia  
message. The following settings are available:  
96  
Messages  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Hide number – Prevent your phone number from being  
displayed in the recipient’s phone. (Subscription dependent).  
To edit item time  
For each item in a page, it is possible to set the time when the  
item appears and for how long it is displayed or played.  
Read report – Request a receipt when the recipient has opened  
your message.  
1. Select the item so it is highlighted  
Delivery report – Request a receipt when the message has been  
delivered to the recipient’s phone.  
2. Select Edit time  
3. Set the Start, which is the number of seconds before the item  
appears after the start of the page. The default is 0, meaning  
show or play immediately.  
Editing multimedia messages  
Here you can see the first  
page with an inserted  
picture.  
4. The default Duration is for the item to continue for the  
remaining duration of the page. To change this, un-check  
Page time and change the duration to the required value in  
seconds. Start time + duration cannot exceed total page time.  
If you have added video or sound and the page time is longer  
than the video or sound play time, the video or sound will  
only play once (it will not be repeated in leftover page time).  
M
e
s
sag  
e
Edit  
Draft  
5
1/1  
10kb  
To delete, replace or edit an  
inserted item  
Select the inserted item and  
choose an action.  
You can also tap  
settings for all items in a page. Tap the time bar to adjust the  
time settings for each item.  
, or select Edit > Page time to see the time  
While editing an image you  
can add scribble, resize, crop  
or rotate your image or add  
text. To undo your changes,  
select Edit > Undo all.  
Edit picture  
Edit time  
Delete  
Copy  
To add or delete a template  
To make a template from a message, select Save as template,  
give the template a name, and tap Done  
Note If you have accepted  
changes by selecting Done,  
you will not be able to undo  
them.  
.
Send  
To delete a template, tap the name of the template you want  
in the Select template dialog and tap Delete  
.
Messages  
97  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To set the download method for receiving multimedia  
messages, manual or automatic  
To enter addresses from Contacts when writing an email  
1. Select To:  
In  
Control panel, select Connections > Messaging accounts >  
2. In the Select contact dialog select the check box for each entry  
MMS > Automatic.  
you want to send the email to.  
Off means that only headers will be downloaded and can  
be viewed.  
3. Select Done.  
Tip To enter several addresses manually (without using  
Contacts) in a text message, multimedia message or in an email:  
enter a comma between each address.  
Home only means the same as for On below, but is only  
valid in your home country.  
On means that the multimedia message is downloaded and  
can be read like any other message. There is no  
intermediate step.  
Sending email  
To send an email message  
Select Send > Send immediately  
.
Handling email  
If your P910i is connected to the Internet when you send an  
email, it will be sent immediately and your P910i will remain  
connected to the Internet. If not, your P910i will connect to the  
Internet and then send the email.  
Writing email  
To write a new email  
Tip If you are creating several messages, and not using GPRS,  
you can reduce connection time by saving them to Outbox and  
then connect and send them all at the same time.  
Select an email account and select Message > New  
.
If you leave the message before sending it, it will automatically  
be stored in the Draft folder (unless you edit a message which  
was already located in Outbox).  
To save an email message and send it later  
Select Send > Save to outbox  
.
To mark an email as urgent  
On the  
address tab, select High in the Priority list.  
98  
Messages  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To move an email message from Outbox to Draft  
To attach a Calendar entry to an email message  
1. Open the entry in Calendar and select Calendar > Send As.  
2. Select Email > Done.  
In your list of Outbox messages, tap to the left of the email (a tick  
appears), and select Message > Move to draft  
.
If you leave the message before sending it, it will automatically  
be stored in the Draft folder (unless it was created from Outbox).  
3. Complete the email message and select Send  
.
To attach a Contact to an email message  
Setting email preferences  
Select Edit > Preferences to open the preferences dialogue.  
1. Open the contact details for the contact you wish to send and  
select Contacts > Send as.  
Email account – The email account you are currently using.  
2. Select Email > Done.  
Always attach your card – The entry in Contacts specified as  
3. Complete the email message and select Send  
.
My card will be attached to your email messages.  
Always reply with history – The contents of the email you  
replay to is included in your new email.  
Receiving email  
Email must be fetched from the email server on the Internet or at  
your office. This can be done manually using the Get & send  
function or automatically by requesting the P910i to check for  
new email at certain times.  
Signature – The signature you write here ends your email  
messages.  
Adding attachments  
When you forward an email, you can choose whether or not to  
forward the attachment. Large attachments increase the size of  
an email and consequently the connection time needed to send  
it.  
To attach an entry to an email message  
1. On the  
attachment tab, select Add.  
2. Select the type of attachment you want to add, and select the  
item.  
Receiving attachments  
‘Send as’ email  
Any attachments to an email message are displayed on the  
tab. The icon next to an attachment in the list identifies the  
type of attachment.  
You can send an open entry as an attachment to a new email  
from multimedia applications, document editors, Internet,  
Calendar, Contacts, Tasks, and Jotter. You can use this service if  
Send as is available in the application’s main menu.  
Messages  
99  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To view an attachment you need a viewer for that type of  
file.Your P910i comes with pre-installed viewers for Microsoft  
Word, Excel, and Adobe Acrobat (PDF) files.  
In your list of messages, headers are denoted by  
.
To download the full message  
1. In your list of messages, select the header.  
2. The dialog Download, Yes/No appears.  
To save an attachment, for example a picture  
1. Open the email message and select the  
tab.  
3. Select Yes  
.
2. Tap the attachment, which opens the Pictures application.  
To download a series of messages  
3. Select Pictures > Save  
.
1. In your list of messages, select the check box to the left of  
each entry (a tick appears).  
4. Select the location where you want to store the message.  
5. Select Save  
.
2. Select Get & Send  
.
You can store items both internally and externally. You can also  
copy them between the internal memory and the Memory Stick.  
See ‘Folders’ on page 29.  
Deleting messages  
You can delete messages both locally and in your email server.  
Downloading  
To delete a message locally  
You can choose not to download large messages and receive just  
a header instead. A header contains the subject line, sender’s  
details, and date, but not the full message.  
1. In your list of messages, select the check box to the left of the  
message header.  
2. Select Message > Local delete.  
To specify a size limit for email, above which you only receive  
a header  
3. Select Yes  
.
The message body and attachments are deleted but the heading  
remains. You can download the message again later.  
1. Select  
Control panel > Connections > Messaging accounts >  
Email (select the email account) > Edit.  
To delete a message both locally and in your email server  
2. Select Inbox.  
1. In your list of messages, select the check box to the left of the  
message header.  
3. Select an option from the Download list.  
100  
Messages  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
2. Select Message > Delete message.  
Disconnecting and connecting  
If your P910i is already connected to the Internet when you send  
an email, it will remain connected after sending it. If your P910i  
is not connected before sending an email, it will connect and  
send the message, and then disconnect.  
3. Select Yes  
.
The message is deleted in your P910i and in your email server  
and will no longer be visible in your message list.  
Note You can send text messages while connected to the  
Internet. If your connection is CSD or HSCSD it must be  
disconnected before you can make or receive a phone call.  
If your connection is GPRS, it may be suspended to enable a  
phone call to be made or received. You may need to repeat the  
data activity (Web page fetch, get email) after the call has  
ended.  
Downloading email automatically  
You can schedule your email messages to be downloaded  
automatically at certain times.  
To download your email automatically  
1. In Control Panel, select Connections > Messaging accounts >  
Email.  
2. Select the required email account and select Edit.  
3. Select Inbox > Schedule.  
If your P910i cannot connect to the email account, automatic  
download will fail, and  
account.  
will be displayed next to the email  
4. Set time or interval for scheduled download and select Done  
.
A scheduled download will fail if your P910i is engaged in a  
voice call. It may fail if it is connected to another ISP, that is,  
through a different Internet account than specified for the email  
account.  
If email messages are not downloaded because a scheduled  
download fails, they will be downloaded during the next  
successful connection.  
Messages  
101  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Note If the email account is set up to access the mail server  
More about messaging  
through a Secure access connection (see ‘Secure tokens’ on  
page 176) you must have the flip open when you use Get&send  
.
If the flip is closed you will see an error message.  
Finding messages  
In both the list of accounts and list of messages, Find searches  
through the subject lines, senders’ details, the text of the  
message.  
Mark read and unread  
Use commands on the Edit menu to mark your received  
messages read or unread. You can also make P910i show just  
unread messages. If you have selected connection type IMAP for  
your email account, the read or unread status will be updated for  
the messages on the server the next time you use the Get&send  
command.  
In an open message, Find searches through the text of the  
message and highlights the text it finds.  
You can only search through email messages that have been  
fully downloaded.  
If you have changed the read or unread status for the messages  
on the server, for example from your PC, the read and unread  
status will change accordingly on your P910i.  
Get and send  
To get and send messages for one specific account  
To select connection type, see “Email account basic tab  
settings” on page 168.  
1. Select  
Messages.  
Note If you change connection type, your Inbox will be emptied.  
Use the Get&send command to download your messages again.  
2. Select the desired account (MMS or email for example).  
3. Select Get&send.  
Full screen view  
To get and send messages for all your accounts  
Use the command Edit > Full screen to view your email messages  
and MMS in full screen. You can also edit email in full screen.  
Set your P910i to open email messages in full screen view by  
default, see “Email account Inbox tab settings” on page 169,  
and to play received MMS in full screen by default, see “MMS  
Advanced settings tabs” on page 171.  
1. Select  
Messages.  
2. Select Message > Get&send. Any unsent messages in your  
Outbox will now be sent and new messages not yet  
downloaded will be downloaded to your P910i.  
102  
Messages  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Saving contact details  
When you receive a message, you can save the contact details of  
the person who sent you the message.  
If your service provider or network is  
unavailable  
Sometimes a message cannot be sent because your P910i cannot  
connect to a network. Please check that the Messaging Account  
and Internet Account information in the Control Panel is correct.  
To save the sender’s details  
On the message’s  
address tab, select From.  
If you have both GPRS and Dial-Up Internet accounts, try  
sending the email message using an account of the other type.  
GPRS Internet accounts use the GPRS network and Dial-Up  
Internet accounts use the GSM network.  
Note If you save an address from an email message  
synchronized from your company PC, the corporate version of  
the address, rather than the full Internet email address, will be  
saved to Contacts. If the corporate version of the address is not  
an Internet address (an X.400 address, or just the sender's  
name, for example), you can use it to send email from your  
synchronized account, but you cannot use it in email that you  
send directly from your P910i.  
Synchronized email  
When you set up a synchronization with your PC, an account for  
synchronized email messages is automatically created on your  
P910i and indicated by  
. You can have more than one  
account for synchronized email, but only one per PC. If you  
send an email as PC mail, the mail will be sent via the PC when  
you have synchronized your P910i with the PC.  
Connecting and disconnecting from the  
Internet  
If you set up a POP or IMAP account which accesses the same  
mail server, the two accounts will contain the same messages.  
Note that there is no connection between the accounts; the  
copies in each account are separate.  
To disconnect from the Internet  
1. Select the connection icon (HSCSD/CSD  
in the status bar.  
or GPRS  
)
2. Select Disconnect from the pop-up menu  
3. The dialog Do you want to disconnect from Internet?, Yes/No  
appears.  
4. Select Yes  
.
Messages  
103  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Area information  
Area information messages are text messages that are sent to all  
subscribers in a certain network area, for example, a local traffic  
report. When you receive an area information message, the  
message automatically appears on the screen. When you dismiss  
the information, it will be stored in the Area info Inbox until it is  
replaced by a new message received on the same channel.  
Please consult your service provider for more information about  
the availability of area information services and area  
information channel numbering. See ‘‘Area tab’ on page 172 for  
more information.  
104  
Messages  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Contacts  
Contacts is like an address book, in which you can store names,  
phone numbers, email addresses and other useful information,  
including photos.  
Menus  
In both list view and detail view, you can use  
some of the P910i’s contact functions. The options will vary  
depending on the situation.  
to access  
The information stored in the SIM is also accessible. SIM  
entries can be copied to Contacts and Contacts entries can be  
copied to the SIM. Some SIM cards have Information numbers  
and Service numbers stored on the SIM card by the operator.  
These numbers are useful for service and information, and are  
accessible from the SIM within Contacts.  
Menu options in list view  
SIM – Display the contacts of the SIM card.  
Send owner card – Send your owner card (See ‘Making an  
owner card’ on page 111) via infrared or Bluetooth wireless  
technology.  
You can synchronize the contents in Contacts with one of the  
PIM applications in your PC supported by the P910i. See  
‘Synchronization and backup’ on page 148.  
Find – Search for a specific contact.  
Undo delete – Restore the last deleted contact. Will appear  
only if there is something to undo.  
# Applications – Access the application list view.  
Using Contacts with the flip  
closed  
Menu options in detail view  
Menu options in detail view: (availability depends on the type of  
contact detail, for example mobile number, that is highlighted.)  
With the flip closed, you can make calls and send text or  
multimedia messages.  
Send SMS – Send a multimedia message to the active contact  
Send MMS – Send a text message to the active contact.  
Call – Call the active contact.  
Contacts has two views when the flip is closed:  
An alphabetical list of contacts. The list view is the  
starting point for finding a contact.  
List view  
The details for a contact.  
Detail view  
Contacts  
105  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Send as – Send the active contact using infrared or Bluetooth  
wireless technology.  
3. Select a contact and press the Jog Dial or press  
the detail view for a contact.  
to open  
Delete contact – Delete the active contact.  
To return to the list view, press  
.
# Applications – Will access the application list view.  
Note To make a call to a contact in the SIM, select SIM from the  
options menu. If there are service numbers or information  
numbers stored on the SIM card, you can also access them.  
Menu options in SIM  
View all – Switch to Contacts list.  
To make a call  
Service numbers – Display the service numbers on the SIM  
card. This option is only displayed if there are service  
numbers stored on the SIM card.  
1. Select a phone number.  
2. Press the Jog Dial or press  
.
Information numbers – As for service numbers above.  
Find – Search for a specific contact.  
or  
1. Select a phone number.  
# Applications – Will access the application list view.  
2. Select Call from the options menu.  
To send a text message  
Selecting a contact with the flip closed  
1. Select a phone number.  
To select a contact  
2. Select Send SMS from the options menu.  
1. Select  
.
To send a multimedia message  
1. Select a phone number.  
2. Then either:  
– Scroll down to the desired contact.  
2. Select Send MMS from the options menu.  
– Press a number key. The first contact corresponding to the  
first letter of the key appears. To search further, continue  
to enter the letters with the keys.  
– Select Find from the menu and search for the contact.  
106  
Contacts  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To add a contact  
The details for a contact.  
Detail view  
Edit view  
Contact details, displayed in a way that allows you  
to add and change the information.  
You can create a new contact using information from a recently  
received voice call or message. See also ‘Add to contacts’ on  
page 59.  
Tabs at the bottom of the list help you to find a contact fast. To  
highlight the first entry that begins with the first character on a  
tab, select the tab once. To highlight the first entry that begins  
with the next character on the tab, select the tab again.  
1. Select Yes when asked to add to contacts.  
2. Enter contact name and edit the number, if required.  
The entries are arranged in Stroke order. If you have selected  
English as language, see ‘Language selection’ on page 175, the  
entries are arranged in Latin alphabetic order.  
To delete a contact  
1. Select the contact.  
2. Select Delete contact from the options menu.  
Stroke order  
To restore a deleted contact, select Undo delete from the  
options menu.  
Contacts in Latin letters are sorted under the first three tabs,  
contacts in Chinese characters under the other tabs.  
Using Contacts with the flip  
open  
Latin order  
abc def ghi jkl mno pqr stu v-z  
Open the flip and tap  
launcher  
or select Contacts in the Application  
to open Contacts.  
Latin entries are arranged in alphabetic order. Chinese entries  
are sorted after the entries in Latin characters under the last tab.  
Contacts has three views when the flip is open:  
An alphabetical list of contacts. The list view is the  
starting point for finding a contact.  
List view  
Making a call with the flip open  
To open Contacts  
Tap  
or select Contacts in the Application launcher  
.
Contacts  
107  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To make a call  
Creating and editing contacts  
1. If required, change folder from the Folders menu.  
You can sort the contacts according to first name, last name or  
2. Scroll down to the desired contact.  
company. The contact entries can also be filtered by folder, such  
If the contact list is long, first select a tab at the bottom of the  
view.  
as Business or Personal  
.
To create a new contact  
3. Select the contact to display the contact details.  
1. Select Contacts > New  
.
4. Depending on what you want to do, make one of the  
following choices:  
2. Enter the desired information. When applicable, select from  
the drop-down menus.  
– Select  
– Select  
– Select  
– Select  
– Select  
or  
or the phone number to make a call.  
or the email address to send an email.  
or the URL to open a Web page.  
to send a multimedia message.  
to send a text message.  
To add a field to a contact  
1. Select the contact.  
2. Select Edit > Edit contact.  
3. Select Edit > Add field.  
4. Select the field to be added from the drop-down list.  
5. Select Add.  
Using service and information numbers  
To call an Information number or Service number on the SIM  
card  
To add a DTMF tone sequence  
1. Select a field and set it to Phone (h)  
.
1. Select SIM in the folders menu.  
Add a new field if necessary.  
2. Select Contacts > Information numbers / Service numbers and  
select a phone number or select a sub-category and then a  
phone number.  
2. Enter a  
p
and then the tone digits. Enter a to insert a pause.  
p
It is necessary to start the tone sequence with a p so the  
phone recognises it as a tone sequence.  
3. Select Call  
.
108  
Contacts  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To send a DTMF tone sequence during a call  
To add a photo or other picture to a contact  
1. During a call, open the contact’s detail view.  
1. Select the photo view tab  
2. Tap the picture space.  
3. If required, change folder.  
4. Select the picture to use.  
5. Tap the Select button.  
.
2. Tap  
at the tone sequence.  
Read more about DTMF tones in ‘Controlling tone-based  
services’ on page 54.  
To add a voice dialling command  
Contacts with a voice dialling command are shown in Voice  
commands in the folders menu.  
To change a picture, select the picture and select Replace  
image.  
To remove a picture, select the picture and select Delete image.  
1. Select  
at the bottom of the screen.  
2. Select a number.  
To personalize the ring melody for a contact  
Contacts with a personalized ring melody are shown in Personal  
ring type in the folders menu.  
3. Tap the Record button and record a voice command after the  
tone.  
4. Tap Play to check the quality of the recording.  
1. Against Ring Tone, select Find sound from the drop-down  
menu.  
To remove a voice command, select the Del button.  
2. If required, change folder.  
3. Select the required sound.  
To add a note to a contact  
1. Select  
.
4. Tap  
and  
to preview the sound.  
2. Enter the text.  
5. Tap Select to set this sound for the contact.  
3. If you do not want the note to be included when you send,  
beam, or synchronize the contact, select the Private check  
box.  
Note The selected ring melody will only be played if the  
network provides a CLI (Calling Line Identity) to enable the  
contact to be identified, otherwise the Default Melody will be  
played.  
Contacts  
109  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Note If the ring melody selected for this contact is later deleted  
See ‘Sending and receiving items’ on page 31 for information  
or moved, the Default Melody will be played.  
about how to receive contacts from another device.  
To change the details of a contact  
1. Select a contact.  
To move, send or delete a contact  
1. Select Contacts > Contacts manager  
.
2. Select Edit > Edit contact, or tap the tab.  
2. Select the contacts you want to manage.  
(If required, change folder from the Folders menu. Selecting  
All will show all the contacts from all the folders except the  
SIM. Clicking the Select all check box will select all the  
contacts in the current folder.)  
3. Change the desired information. When applicable, select  
from the drop-down menus.  
To delete a contact  
3. Select Send / Move / Delete  
.
1. Select the contact.  
4. Follow the instructions, for example, select a folder or a  
sending method.  
2. Select Contacts > Delete contact.  
To create or edit a contact on the SIM card  
5. Tap Done or Yes to confirm the action.  
1. Select SIM from the Folders menu.  
To search for an entry containing specific text  
1. Select Contacts > Find.  
2. Create or edit the contact as described above.  
All options are, however, not available for the SIM card  
contacts.  
2. Enter the text string you wish to search for.  
3. Select either In all fields or In Names & Company and tap Find.  
4. When the search is complete, all results will be displayed.  
Managing contacts  
You can use Contacts manager to move contacts between the  
folders, send contacts as a Vcard to another device, or to delete  
them. You can also send or delete contacts on the SIM card with  
Note Searching is not case sensitive and you do not have to  
enter an entire word to locate a matching entry.  
the Contacts manager  
.
110  
Contacts  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
2. Select Contacts > Set as owner card  
.
Copying contacts to and from the SIM card  
You can also copy information between the contacts list and the  
SIM card.  
Tip You can also create an owner card by viewing the detail  
view of a contact and selecting the menu option Set as owner card  
.
To copy contacts from the SIM card  
To send your owner card  
1. Select SIM in the folders menu to the right in the menu bar.  
1. Open the list view, and then select Contacts > Send owner card  
2. Send the card using Send as  
.
2. Select Edit > Copy all to Contacts for copying all SIM entries  
or  
.
Read more about sending items in ‘Sending and receiving items’  
on page 31.  
Tap a SIM entry to open it and select Edit > Copy to Contacts to  
copy the selected SIM entry.  
To view or edit your owner card  
To copy contacts to the SIM card  
Select Contacts > View owner card.  
1. Select a contact.  
2. Select Edit > Copy to SIM card  
.
Preferences  
If the contact has multiple phone numbers each number will be  
created as a separate entry in the SIM phone book.  
Contacts tab  
Making an owner card  
To sort the contact list and show the preferred phone number  
You can create an electronic business card, containing your  
contact details, including notes and a photo. You can then send  
this card to another device.  
1. Select Edit > Preferences  
.
2. Select the desired sorting option (first name, last name or  
company) and tap Done.  
To create your owner card  
3. If you want a phone number to be shown next to the name in  
list view, select Show preferred phone number  
.
1. Select Contacts > New and enter your details.  
Contacts  
111  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
If no preferred number has been set up for the contact, the  
first phone number will be used.  
4. Select Done.  
To change the preferred phone number  
1. Select a contact.  
2. Select Edit > Edit contact  
.
3. Select Edit > Show in list.  
4. Select the number to be shown from the list.  
5. Tap Done.  
Note If no number appears, ensure that Show preferred phone  
number is checked in preferences.  
112  
Contacts  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Calendar  
The Calendar function helps you to keep track of appointments  
and events, and you can also set reminder alarms for the entries.  
Creating calendar entries  
A reminder is denoted by a  
.
To create a new calendar entry  
1. Select Calendar > New and enter a short description of the  
Different views  
entry. This is the description you see in the calendar.  
You can see your Calendar entries in three views with the flip  
open: Day, Week and Month. With the flip closed you will see  
the Day view.  
2. Tap Unfiled (the folder menu) in the menu bar and select a  
folder to store the entry in.  
3. Continue to enter information for the items on the detail  
page.  
To change view in flip open  
Type - Specify if the entry is an appointment, reminder or  
all day event.  
Tap  
Tap  
Tap  
Tap  
to display the Day view.  
to display the Week view.  
Date - Select the date to get a calendar where you can set a  
date for the entry.  
to display the Month view.  
to navigate to the present day in the displayed view.  
Time - Set start and end time for the entry.  
If you tap an entry in week view, the subject and time for that  
entry are shown.  
Location - Specify a location or select a location you have  
used before.  
Alarm - Select the check box if you want your P910i to  
alert you about the entry with a sound. Select the time and  
date that appears for your settings.  
To navigate backwards or forwards in the current view  
Tap the left and right arrows in the button bar at the bottom of  
the screen. You can also rotate the Jog Dial.  
Repeat - Specify if you want to repeat the entry or not.  
Read more about this below.  
To navigate to a specific date in the current view  
Tap the day, week or month heading at the top of the display to  
show a calendar pop-up in which you can select a specific date.  
Calendar  
113  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Private - Select the check box to prevent the item from  
being viewed by others than yourself if you synchronize  
your calendar with, for example, your PC.  
Managing calendar entries  
To find a certain entry  
4. Select the note page tab to write a note for this entry.  
5. Select to save and close the entry.  
1. Select Calendar > Find  
.
2. Enter a search word in the menu that appears.  
3. Select where to search (Everywhere, Future, Past).  
4. Select Find. A result list is then displayed.  
5. Select an entry on the result list to open it.  
You should delete old entries regularly to release memory.  
To create re-occurring entries  
1. When the entry is open, select Repeat  
.
– Set repeating to Daily Monthly by date, Monthly by  
,
Weekly  
,
To delete an entry  
day  
,
Yearly by date or Yearly by day.  
Open the entry and select Calendar > Delete entry  
.
Interval - Specify how often the event will happen, for  
example, by selecting Weekly and Interval 2 means that the  
event will go off every two weeks on the specified day.  
A deleted entry may be restored with Edit > Undo delete  
.
To delete all entries in a period of time  
Forever/Until - Set the time limit for the alarm or select  
forever.  
1. Select Calendar > Remove entries  
.
2. Select the time period and select Done. All entries from that  
2. Select days - Weekly repeated events can be set to occur twice  
or more in a week. For example, eating lunch with a friend  
Tuesday and Friday every week.  
time period are deleted from the Calendar.  
Note Repeated entries will not be deleted.  
Note You cannot repeat All Day Events  
To copy, cut or paste an entry  
1. Open the entry.  
To edit an entry  
2. Select Edit > Copy entry/ Cut entry.  
3. Go to the day where you want to place the entry.  
4. Select Paste entry.  
1. Open the entry by tapping it in the calendar.  
2. Make the changes in accordance with the instructions above.  
114  
Calendar  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To move a Calendar item to Tasks  
2. Select the General tab, and fill in the required details.  
1. Open the entry and select Calendar > Move to Tasks  
.
To customize the alarm settings  
1. Select Edit > Preferences.  
2. Select the Alarm tab.  
2. The entry is moved, not copied.  
If you move an entry with an alarm, the alarm will also sound in  
Tasks.  
Now, you can change the Alarm precedes event by setting - the  
To cut or copy Calendar entries to the Tasks application  
1. Open the entry and select Edit > Cut entry or Copy entry.  
2. Open Tasks.  
length of time before an entry that the alarm goes off.  
To assign colours to your entries using the folders  
1. In Calendar, select the folders menu to the right in the menu  
3. Select Edit > Paste entry.  
bar and select Edit folders.  
2. Select a folder and select Edit or create a new folder by  
selecting Add  
3. Select the colour box and select colour for that folder and  
select Done  
.
Sending and receiving calendar  
entries  
.
You can send and receive calendar entries using Send as. See  
Entries in a folder with a specific colour appear in that colour in  
Day and Week views (but not in Month view) so that you can  
see the pattern of events in your diary. Reminders appear as  
whatever the folder colour.  
‘Sending and receiving items’ on page 31.  
Preferences  
You can customize the calendar views and alarm settings to suit  
your own needs.  
Saving changes  
If you leave Calendar while editing an entry, your changes will  
be saved automatically.  
To customize the calendar view, General tab  
1. Select Edit > Preferences.  
Calendar  
115  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Lunar calendar  
You can look up the Lunar Calendar correspondence for a  
specified date ranging from January 1 1901 to December 31  
2100, where the current day is highlighted in red and public  
holidays are displayed in red fonts.  
Jog Dial backwards - Hides the current process so that it  
runs in the background.  
When the Year / Month list appears, rotate Jog Dial up or  
down and then Jog Dial inwards to select the desired year or  
month.  
To use the Lunar Calendar  
Click the button in the left of the Month - Shows the  
previous month within the current year; and displays  
information for December of last year if it were January  
currently.  
Click the button in the right of the Month - Shows the next  
month within the current year; and displays information for  
January of the following year if it were December currently.  
Click the Month - Displays the list of months.  
Click the button in the left of the Year - Shows the  
information for the current month of last year.  
Click the button in the right of the Year - Shows the  
information for the current month of next year.  
Click the Year - Displays the list of years.  
You can also use Jog Dial for some operations:  
Jog Dial forwards - Displays the menu.  
116  
Lunar calendar  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Tasks  
With the Tasks function you can make a list of things you need  
to do. The folders help you to separate different types of  
activities.  
Completed – Select the check box when the task is  
done.This can also be done directly in the Tasks list.  
Priority – Set a priority for the task. You can sort the tasks  
by priority.  
You can move entries between Tasks and the Calendar, which is  
useful when you come to schedule a Tasks entry. You can also  
send an entry via text message, infrared, Bluetooth wireless  
technology, multimedia message or email.  
Due date – Select the check box to set a deadline for the  
task. Select the date that appears to get a calendar where  
you can set a due date.  
Alarm – Select the check box if you want your P910i to  
alert you about the task. Select the time and date that  
appears for your settings.  
Creating task entries  
Private – Select the check box to prevent the task from  
being visible by others, when synchronized with shared  
calendars or tasks in other devices, for example your PC.  
The Tasks list shows a short description of the task. Select a task  
to see its full information.  
A task entry consists of two pages. One detail page where you  
set the properties for the task, and one page where you can add  
notes.  
4. Select the note page tab to write a note for this entry.  
5. Select to save and close the task.  
Note Delete will delete the whole task entry.  
To create a new task entry  
1. Select Tasks > New and enter a short description of the task.  
To edit an entry  
This is the description you see in the task list.  
1. Open the entry by tapping it in the Tasks list.  
2. Make the changes according to the instructions above.  
2. Select Unfiled (the folder menu) in the menu bar and select a  
folder to store the task in.  
3. Continue to enter information for the items on the detail  
page.  
Tasks  
117  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To restore a deleted entry  
Managing task entries  
Select Edit > Undo delete.  
To open an existing entry  
Select the entry in the Tasks list.  
To delete all completed entries  
In your Tasks list, select Tasks > Delete completed  
.
To mark an entry as completed  
Note When you delete All Completed Entries, they are deleted  
Select the check box to the left of the entry in the Tasks list.  
permanently and cannot be restored.  
To sort the entries  
Select Edit > Sort on priority or Sort on date  
.
Moving task entries  
To find a certain entry  
To move an entry to the Calendar  
Open the entry and select Tasks > Move to Calendar. The entry is  
moved, not copied.  
1. Select Tasks > Find  
.
2. Enter a search word.  
3. Select in which folder to search or use the default value  
To copy a task entry to Calendar  
All folders  
.
1. Open the entry and select Edit > Copy entry  
.
4. Select Find. A result list is then displayed.  
2. Open Calendar.  
5. Select an entry on the result list to open it.  
3. Enter the day you wish the task to appear.  
4. Select Edit > Paste entry in Calendar.  
To make a copy of an entry or paste an entry  
1. Open a task and select Edit > Copy entry.  
2. In list view, select Edit > Paste entry.  
Note If you move or copy an entry to the Calendar, it will lose  
the priority it was assigned in Tasks.  
To delete an entry  
Open the entry in the task list and then select Delete  
.
118  
Tasks  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
If you do not set a due date for the task entry, the current date  
will be used for the new Calendar entry. If you move or copy an  
entry with an alarm, the alarm will also be moved to the  
Calendar.  
Sending and receiving task  
entries  
You can send and receive task entries using Send as. See  
‘Sending and receiving items’ on page 31.  
Preferences  
Select Edit > Preferences to change the settings. The following  
settings are available.  
Display due dates – Select whether or not to display them in  
the Tasks list.  
Display completed – Select whether or not to display them  
in the Tasks list. This will not delete the completed tasks.  
Tasks  
119  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Jotter  
The Jotter works as a notebook where you can write notes and  
draw pictures. The folders help you to separate different types of  
notes.  
To edit a note while working with it  
For text, select Edit > Revert.  
The text returns to its original state. All changes are lost.  
A Jotter entry consists of two pages. One text page and one  
drawing page. With the flip closed, you can read and edit your  
notes, but you cannot view or edit pictures.  
For sketches, select Edit > Undo.  
This choice removes your last pen stroke. If you change your  
mind, select Edit > Redo  
.
When opening Jotter you will see a list of entered notes, with the  
first words of each text note. Select a note to see its full  
information or edit it.  
To create a new note from text or sketches copied from another  
application  
Open the list of notes and select Edit > Paste  
.
Note If you paste a sketch over an existing sketch, the existing  
sketch will be deleted.  
Creating and editing notes  
Create a note with the flip closed (text only)  
To create a new note  
1. Select Applications >Jotter with the flip closed.  
1. Open Jotter and select Jotter >New.  
2. If you have previous notes stored, these will now be listed.  
Use the Jog Dial to select a previous note in order to open it.  
The new note will automatically start as a text note. Select  
a
to get bold text and  
to create a bullet list.  
a
3. Press  
if you want to create a new note. Select New.  
2. Select Unfiled (the folder menu) in the menu bar and select a  
Insert your text by using the keypad.  
folder to store the jotter in.  
3. Select the drawing page tab to draw a sketch for this note.  
Edit a note with the flip closed  
4. Select  
to save and close the note.  
1. Select Applications >Jotter with the flip closed.  
2. Use the Jog Dial to select a previous note in order to open it.  
120  
Jotter  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
3. Press  
. Select Edit. Insert your text using the keypad.  
Managing notes  
To delete a note  
Drawing pictures  
1. Select the note in the notes list.  
The note opens.  
You can draw with different  
nib widths and colours. The  
2. Select Jotter > Delete note  
.
main window is the ‘paper’  
where you can draw with  
your stylus in the same way  
as you draw with an ordinary  
pen.  
Jotter Edit  
Unfiled  
Sending and receiving notes  
You can send and receive notes using Send as. See ‘Sending and  
receiving items’ on page 31.  
Select  
to change colour.  
to change the  
Note Selecting Send as SMS will send the text only.  
Select  
virtual nib.  
Select  
to activate the  
eraser. Tap the eraser again to  
re-activate the pen.  
All jotter files (both text and  
drawings) are automatically  
stored in the P910i. The list  
view will be presented to you as soon as you start the Jotter  
application.  
Jotter  
121  
           
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
TOOLS  
Sound recorder  
In Sound recorder you can record and listen to your own sound  
recordings. You can also send your recordings to other devices  
via Bluetooth wireless technology, infrared communication,  
email or multimedia message, and use a sound recording as a  
ring signal.  
2. Select  
3. Select  
and start recording after the beep.  
to finish the recording.  
Key functions  
Select... To...  
Each memo is identified by the date and time it was recorded  
and by its position in the list of sound recordings.  
start recording a sound.  
listen to the current sound recording.  
stop the current sound recording.  
Making sound recordings  
go to the previous sound recording in the list.  
go to the next sound recording in the list.  
To record and save a sound recording  
1. Select  
>
> New.  
A new sound recording is created.  
To delete a sound recording  
1. Select a sound recording you want to delete.  
2. Select and start recording after the beep.  
3. Select to finish the recording.  
2. Select Delete recording > Yes  
.
The new sound recording is automatically saved in the list of  
sound recordings with the current date and time.  
Using sound recordings as ring  
signals  
To append to the end of a previous sound recording  
You can set a sound recording as a ring signal.Your sound  
recordings will appear in the list of sounds that can be selected  
1. Select the required recording.  
122  
Sound recorder  
             
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
as ring signals. They will take the form voicenote and a number,  
for example voicenote1470  
.
To set a sound recording as a ring signal see ‘Sounds and alerts’  
on page 157.  
Sending sound recordings  
You can send Sound recorder recordings via Bluetooth wireless  
technology, infrared communication, email or as a multimedia  
message.  
To send a sound recording  
1. Select Sound recorder > Send as  
.
2. Select how you want to send the sound recording. See To  
send an item using Send as’ on page 31 for more  
information.  
Note All other sound media on your P910i is handled via the  
Music player application. You can send sound items from  
Music player and all received sound items are played using Music  
player  
.
Sound recorder  
123  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Calculator  
The Calculator is a standard 12-digit calculator. You can add,  
subtract, multiply, divide, calculate square roots and  
Key functions  
mr  
m+  
m-  
Tap once to retrieve a value from the memory and enter it  
into the screen.  
Tap twice to clear the memory.  
percentages. It also has a memory function.  
To use the calculator  
Tap once to store an entered value in the memory.  
If you have already entered a value in the memory, tap once  
to add the value on the screen to the value in the memory.  
1. Select  
>
.
2. Enter the calculations by tapping the digits.  
Tap once to subtract the entered value from the value in the  
memory. The memory is adjusted but not displayed.  
All calculations, except percentage calculations, are performed  
in the order they are entered, for example: 5+5x5=50, not 30.  
Tap once to delete the last digit you entered.  
Tap once to reset the screen to 0.  
Percentage calculations are performed backwards. To calculate,  
for example, 10% of 50, enter 50x10%. The result is displayed  
when you tap the %-key.  
C
You can copy and paste values to and from other applications by  
selecting Calculator > Copy or Paste  
.
Values stored in the memory are retained while using other  
applications.  
124  
Calculator  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Time  
The time and date are always displayed on the flip closed  
standby screen. You can customize the display of times and  
dates throughout your P910i. You can set your current location  
and another location of your choice. It is also possible to set  
three different alarms.  
Use the am/pm box to switch between am and pm. (This is  
only possible if you use the 12-hour time format.) Confirm  
by tapping outside the time picker.  
6. Select Done  
.
Format  
Setting time and date  
You can specify how you want the time and date to be displayed  
on the screen, and if you want to use the 12- or 24-hour time  
format.  
To set the current time and date  
1. Select  
>
.
To set the time and date display format  
2. Tap the clock, or select Time > Set time & date, to view the  
1. Select  
>
.
current time and date settings.  
2. Tap the clock, or select Time > Set time & date, to view the  
3. Tap the Date box, then use the arrows to set the current year  
and month. Then select the current day.  
current time and date settings.  
3. Select Format  
.
4. Tap Summertime, then select the check box next to the zone  
that currently has summer time and tap Done. This is only  
required if you are currently in a country/region with summer  
time.  
4. Tap the Date Format box and choose a format.  
5. Tap the Date Separator box and choose a separator.  
6. Select a Time format  
.
5. Tap the time box, then tap the upper half of the hour or  
minute box to increase the number displayed, or the lower  
half to decrease the number.  
7. Tap the Time separator box and choose a separator.  
8. Select Done  
.
Time  
125  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To set the locations  
Specifying workdays  
1. Select  
>
.
You can specify what days you work, if, for example, you want  
to set an alarm that sounds only on workdays. You can also  
specify the first day of your week to customize the display of  
both Week and Month views in Calendar.  
2. Tap Time > Set location  
.
3. Tap the Current Country/Region box and select the country/  
region you are in at that moment.  
4. Tap the Current City box and select the city you are in at that  
moment. If the city you are in is not listed, select the city  
closest to you.  
To specify your workdays  
1. Select  
>
.
2. Tap the clock, or select Time > Set time & date, to view the  
5. Tap the Other Country/Region box and choose a country/  
region.  
current time and date settings.  
3. Select Workdays  
.
6. Tap the Other City box and choose a city.  
4. Select the check boxes next to the days you normally work.  
7. Tap Done  
.
5. Select First day of week and choose a day.  
6. Tap Done  
.
Setting number formats  
You can choose how you want the measurements and numbers  
in your P910i to be displayed in all your applications. Distances  
can be displayed using the imperial or the metric system and  
different punctuation marks can be used as separators.  
Setting locations  
Specify the country/region and city you are currently in. The  
city you select will be displayed next to the clock in Time.  
If you are away from home, for example travelling in another  
country/region, it can be useful to know what the time is in your  
home country/region as well as the country/region you are in.  
The city you select as Other City will be displayed below the  
clock in Time.  
To set the number details  
1. Select  
>
.
2. Select Time > Set location  
.
3. Select Numbers  
.
126  
Time  
           
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
4. Choose separators and symbol positions from the drop-down  
lists. You can tap the keyboard icon to find currency  
symbols.  
2. Select one of the alarm slots.  
3. Select Time and choose at what time you want the alarm to go  
off. Confirm by tapping outside the time picker.  
5. Tap Done  
.
4. Select When and choose how often you want the alarm to go  
off:  
Once The alarm will go off once only, at a time more than  
24 hours from now but within the next eight days.  
Setting alarms  
You can set up to three different alarms in your P910i. You can  
choose to activate one of the preset alarms, or set a new alarm  
with your own definitions.  
Next 24 hours Within the next 24 hours.  
Daily Every day at the specified time.  
Workdays Every workday at the specified time.  
Weekly Every week at the specified time.  
You can choose to set a silent alarm, where only a message is  
displayed when it goes off, or you can set a sound alert.  
5. Select Alarm sound and choose a sound.  
Alarms requires that the P910i is turned on. If you want to get  
alarms in an environment where radio transmitters are not  
allowed, you can set the P910i to flight mode, see ‘Flight mode’  
on page 53.  
6. Select Message and choose a preset message or write a new  
one.  
7. Tap Done  
.
8. Make sure the check box next to the alarm is selected.  
Note If you have connected a stereo headset to the P910i, the  
alarm will only be heard in the headset.  
When the alarm goes off, select Snooze to postpone the alarm for  
five minutes or Silence to turn off the alarm sound. To turn off  
the alarm completely, tap Done  
.
To activate an existing alarm  
Select the check box in the alarm slot.  
status bar on the screen.  
is displayed on the  
To set a new alarm  
1. Select  
>
.
Time  
127  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
With Quickword™ and Quicksheet™ you can view and edit  
Common viewer and editor  
Microsoft Word and Excel documents. With Pdf+ you can view  
Adobe™ Acrobat™ (PDF) documents. Quickpoint™ is a  
viewer for Microsoft PowerPoint presentations. Animations and  
functions  
embedded objects will be shown as plain text.  
To open a document from an email or Internet page  
Select the document link. The document viewer opens the  
document in the detail view.  
When the flip is open there are two views:  
An alphabetical list of files, for selecting a file to  
view.  
List view  
To open a document from the list view  
1. Select the Application launcher icon  
2. Select, for example, the Quickword icon  
3. If required, change folder.  
The contents of a file, for viewing and editing the  
file.  
Detail view  
.
.
The applications are also started automatically when selecting  
and opening attachments to messages.  
4. Scroll to the desired file and select the file name.  
5. The document is shown in the detail view.  
To save documents to another location (internal or on the  
Memory Stick) you use folders, see ‘Folders’ on page 29.  
The functions available differ depending on the document type.  
Common functions are similar between the applications and are  
described first.  
Please read the help texts for detailed information about the  
viewers and editors.  
128  
Viewers and editors – Quickoffice  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Quickword  
Quicksheet  
To save and copy the document to a special folder  
To save and copy the document to a special folder  
1. In the list view, scroll to the desired file and select Quickword  
1. In the list view, scroll to the desired file and select Quicksheet  
> Copy  
.
> Copy.  
2. Select where to save the document, and select Copy  
.
2. Select where to save the document, and select Copy.  
To edit a document  
To edit a document  
In the detail view, from the toolbar at the bottom of the screen,  
The first time you edit a document (in native Microsoft Excel  
format) transferred to your P910i, you have to rename it. When  
you select OK, your P910i copies the document with the new  
name.  
select the edit icon  
.
The first time you edit a document (in native Microsoft Word  
format) transferred to your P910i, you have to rename it. When  
you select OK, your P910i copies the document with the new  
name.  
At the bottom of the screen you find the spreadsheet character  
input field, and icons for performing the most common  
spreadsheet functions.  
In the toolbar you find icons for performing the most common  
word-processing functions.  
When you have edited the document and leave it, your P910i  
saves it automatically.  
When you have finished editing and leave the document, your  
P910i saves it automatically.  
Viewers and editors – Quickoffice  
129  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Viewing a presentation  
The presentation opens by default in Outline view where the  
Quickpoint  
outline of the whole presentation appears. You can shift to Notes  
view where you can see the notes to each slide, or to Slide view  
to show the slides.  
To open a presentation from the list view  
1. Select the Application launcher icon  
2. Select the Quickpoint icon  
.
Navigate through the presentation with the stylus and the Jog  
Dial. Change the type of viewing from the toolbar at the bottom  
of the screen. The commands are also available from the menus:  
3. If required, change folder.  
4. Scroll to the required file and select the file name.  
5. The presentation is shown in the detail view.  
Outline view. Show the slide headings and the sub texts.  
Notes view. Show notes added to a slide.  
Slide view. Show the presentation.  
Switch between fullscreen view and normal view.  
Show next slide.  
To open a presentation from and email or Internet page  
Select the document link. Quickpoint opens the presentation in  
the detail view.  
To handle a presentation file  
1. Highlight the presentation file in list view.  
2. Select the required command from the Quickpoint menu.  
Show previous slide.  
Expand the current slide (in Outline view).  
Collapse the current slide (in Outline view).  
Zoom in (in Slide view).  
Zoom out (in Slide view).  
130  
Viewers and editors – Quickoffice  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Wraps the document, that is the text is displayed in a format  
which fits the screen. Images and line drawings are not visible  
in this view.  
Pdf+  
To save and copy a received document  
Unwraps the document.  
1. In the detail view, from the toolbar at the bottom of the  
Search.  
screen, select the save icon  
.
2. Name the document, select where to save it, and select Save  
.
Search for links.  
To move a document  
In the detail view, from the folder menu, select a new folder.  
To view a document  
Control the viewing from the toolbar at the bottom of the screen:  
Bookmarks view. Select a heading to go to the corresponding  
page. You can also use the Jog Dial to select a bookmark, and  
then use the icon below to go to the corresponding page.  
Takes you to the selected page.  
Returns you to the page view.  
Previous page.  
Next page.  
Full screen.  
To return to the normal view, select the icon and de-select  
Full screen.  
Viewers and editors – Quickoffice  
131  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
File manager  
With the File Manager you can view, rename, copy, move, and  
delete files on the P910i. You can also add folders, send files  
and rename and format the Memory Stick.  
To move within the folder structure  
To move up in the hierarchy - tap the top folder.  
To view the contents of a folder or a file - tap the folder.  
Folders are opened in the file manager while other files are  
opened in the applicable application.  
Initially, the root view is shown, with the sub folders:  
Audio, where all audio files are stored.  
Document, where different document files are stored.  
To add a folder  
Image, where all images, pictures as well as drawings, are  
1. Select File > New folder  
.
stored.  
2. Type a folder name and tap Done  
.
Other, where all files not applicable for the other folders are  
stored.  
To copy or move one or more files  
Video, where all video clips are stored.  
1. Select the files to handle.  
Using the folder menu, you can select between the internal  
storage and the external storage, that is, the Memory Stick. The  
path to the selected folder is shown at the top of the window.  
2. Select the required activity from the File menu.  
3. Select the destination and tap Done  
.
Note There is an important distinction between External-media  
To delete one or more folders or files  
and External-other External-other lets you view folders that have  
.
Note Only empty folders can be deleted.  
been placed on the Memory Stick by other equipment, such as  
digital cameras. This is the only place where these folders can  
be viewed.  
1. Select the folders or files to delete.  
2. Select File > Delete  
.
From the file manager it is possible to reach the Control Panel  
storage manager, see ‘Storage manager’ on page 177. You can  
also format the Memory Stick, see ‘Formatting a Memory Stick’  
on page 23.  
3. Tap Delete  
.
132  
File manager  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To change properties for one or more folders or files  
1. Select the folders or files to change.  
2. Select File > Properties  
.
3. Change the properties, as required.  
4. Tap Done  
.
File manager  
133  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Online services  
Online services is a customized service offered by a network  
i
operator. This function is network- or subscription-dependent.  
Online services provides a mechanism that allows applications  
that exist on the SIM to interact and operate with the P910i. It  
may provide services ranging from weather forecasts to the  
latest information from the stock market.  
Online service are placed on your SIM card by your operator.  
Note Contact your operator to find out which services are  
available for your account.  
Note If this service is available on your SIM, the Online  
services application will appear in the application list under a  
name defined by the SIM provider. However, the icon used to  
represent the Online services application  
will not change.  
i
134  
Online services  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Dictionary  
The dictionary application contains both English - Chinese and  
Chinese - English dictionaries.  
Chinese meaning (English - Chinese dictionary only).  
Synonym (optional, English - Chinese dictionary only).  
Antonym (optional, English - Chinese dictionary only).  
The dictionary operates in flip open mode only. Closing the flip  
will shut the dictionary down.  
English usage examples and its Chinese meaning (optional,  
English - Chinese dictionary only).  
Views  
There are three views in Dictionary:  
General View – where the user inputs a word and is given a  
brief explanation. Depending on the settings, the information  
is displayed horizontally or vertically.  
Searching for a word  
To look up a word in the dictionary  
Detail View – where the detailed explanation of a selected  
entry is displayed.  
1. Select the dictionary icon  
The dictionary opens.  
.
Bookmark view – where the words you have saved are  
displayed. Depending on the settings, the information is  
displayed horizontally or vertically.  
2. Enter a word in the input box.  
– When entering an English word, the word can be entered  
letter by letter. The English index is shown. The index  
changes when the input changes.  
The explanation content includes:  
– When entering a Chinese word, the Chinese index is  
shown.  
Headword.  
Phonetic symbol.  
– The general index shows the next closest entry to the  
entered word.  
Part of speech (for example verb, noun, English - Chinese  
dictionary only).  
3. Select an entry in the index.  
Grammatical variation (optional, English - Chinese  
dictionary only).  
The brief explanation of the word is displayed.  
Dictionary  
135  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
4. To view the detailed description of the word, select the detail  
view button  
1. Enter a word where one or more letters are substituted for  
wildcard characters. The question mark (?) represents any  
one character, and the asterisk (*) represents any number of  
characters.  
.
5. To view the detailed description of an underlined word in the  
description, select the word.  
2. Select the search button  
.
6. To go back and forward between the detailed views, select  
the navigation buttons  
.
To look up bookmarked words  
To look up previously entered words  
Select the bookmark view button  
.
1. Select the drop-down box at the input box.  
2. A history list of previously entered words is displayed.  
3. Select one of the words in the list.  
History record and bookmarks  
To clear the history list  
To use fuzzy search  
Normal search returns the words in the list that are  
alphabetically closest to the input word. Fuzzy search returns  
the words whose spelling is closest to the input word.  
Select Edit > Clear history.  
To add a word to the bookmark list  
Note Fuzzy search can only be used when searching the  
1. Look up a word, following the instructions given above.  
dictionary with English words.  
2. Select the add to bookmark button  
.
1. Perform a normal search.  
To delete Bookmarks  
2. Select the search button  
.
1. Select the bookmarks to delete, by clicking to the right of the  
bookmark. If all bookmarks are to be deleted, select Edit >  
Select all.  
To use wildcards  
Note Wildcards can only be used when searching the dictionary  
with English words.  
2. Select Dictionary > Delete bookmark  
.
136  
Dictionary  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
4. Select the number of words in the history drop-down list.  
Dictionary database  
5. Select Done  
.
You can use four databases:  
To move the line between the index and description  
1. Press and hold the stylus on the line.  
2. Move the line as required.  
One English - Chinese database and one Chinese - English  
database in the telephone.  
One English - Chinese database and one Chinese - English  
database in the external storage.  
To update a database  
You update the database from the PC using the PC software.  
After the update, information on the database is displayed.  
To delete a database  
1. Select Edit > Delete database  
.
2. Select the database to delete.  
3. Select Delete.  
Settings  
To set-up Dictionary  
1. Select Edit >Preferences  
.
2. Select if you want the general and bookmark views tiled  
horizontally or vertically.  
3. Select the desired sort order for the bookmarks.  
Dictionary  
137  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
ADVANCED FUNCTIONS  
PC Suite and Content and Application  
Installation of the Sony Ericsson PC Suite  
The Sony Ericsson PC Suite programs can be used with Windows  
ME, 98, 2000 and XP.  
Sony Ericsson PC Suite  
The Sony Ericsson PC Suite CD delivered with your P910i  
contains a set of useful applications:  
When inserting the CD in the PC, a start menu is automatically  
shown. Select language and then start the Sony Ericsson PC Suite  
Setup. Follow the instructions in the installation wizard.  
Synchronization – Synchronization of Calendar, Notes,  
Contacts and Tasks against Microsoft Outlook, Lotus Notes  
and Lotus Organizer.  
Backup and Restore – Make safety copies of your data via  
SyncStation.  
If the start menu is not automatically shown, use the Run  
command in the Windows Start menu to start Start.exe from your  
CD drive.  
File Manager – Transfer files (images, documents, music) via  
Windows® Explorer between your P910i and PC.  
By default the Sony Ericsson PC Suite is accessed from Start menu  
Install software – Install applications in the P910i.  
> Programs > Sony Ericsson > P910i.  
Dial-Up Networking Wizard – Wizard for GPRS and HSCSD  
settings for using your P910i as a modem.  
The Setup application also can be used later to add or delete  
components.  
Drivers – Drivers for modem and the USB cable connected  
SyncStation.  
You can download the latest PC Suite software from  
www.SonyEricsson.com/support  
Refer to the online help for each specific application.  
138  
PC Suite and Content and Application  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Content and Application  
The Content and Application CD contains a number of applications  
and files to be installed in, or downloaded to, your P910i and  
used together with its applications.  
Games.  
Audio files.  
Pictures.  
Video clips.  
MMS templates.  
MMS editor.  
Image editor.  
Opening the Content and Application CD  
When you insert the CD in the PC, a start menu opens  
automatically. Select an item from the menu and follow the  
instructions on the PC screen.  
If the start menu is not automatically shown, use the Run  
command in the Windows Start menu to start CDBrowser.exe from  
your CD drive.  
PC Suite and Content and Application  
139  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Installing applications  
It is possible to install new applications in your P910i. These  
applications can be obtained in several ways, for example:  
guaranteed to work correctly or securely, and users install them  
at their own risk. Product failures caused by applications not  
approved or made for Sony Ericsson will not be covered by your  
warranty.  
from the Internet.  
from a CD.  
from a Memory Stick.  
as an email attachment.  
Installing applications on your  
P910i  
There are two types of installation files for applications:  
SIS (Symbian Standard Installation) made for P910i or other  
Sony Ericsson devices.  
Installation file security  
Installation files in SIS format are typically used for installation  
of Epoc or PersonalJava™ applications or other content into the  
P910i file system.The vendor who prepared the SIS file decides  
where in the file system the various content of the SIS file will  
be installed. This means that you need to decide if you trust that  
the SIS file does not contain harmful content. If you are certain  
of the origin of the SIS file you can take an installation decision  
based on what you know about that vendor. Your P910i supports  
cryptographic verification of vendor identity.  
MIDP JAR (Mobile Information Device Profile Java  
Archive).  
Note SIS and JAR files are installation packages containing one  
or more files.  
Programs made for the Sony Ericsson P800 and P900 series can  
also be used in the P910i.  
This chapter also applies to other types of software to install, for  
example, system components and add-ons.  
During installation the P910i verifies a digital signature and  
certificate in the SIS file against a root certificate in the phone.  
Successful verification means that you can trust the origin of the  
SIS file and that the content has not been modified after it was  
Applications from developers outside Sony Ericsson, so-called  
third-party developers, might be possible to install in the P910i.  
Applications which are not approved by Sony Ericsson are not  
140  
Installing applications  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
created. If the SIS file does not contain a digital signature you  
will be given a warning about the problem but you can still  
decide to proceed with the installation at your own risk. In  
general, it is recommended that you install only from SIS files  
where the vendor identity and file integrity can be verified.  
Download to the P910i begins.  
5. Installation starts when the download is complete.  
From the P910i  
Program packages, for example, games, can also be downloaded  
to your P910i from the Internet or from a Memory Stick. When  
downloading a file from the Internet, the installation will start  
automatically when the file is completely downloaded to your  
P910i. The procedure below describes installation of application  
packages transferred to the P910i but not yet installed.  
Note Installation of uncertified applications may cause your  
system to crash and all your data will then be lost.  
MIDP applications run in a protected environment with no  
access to sensitive information so no signatures are required for  
MIDP JAR files.  
See ‘To download and upload files, for example, applications’  
on page 84 for information about how to download files from  
the Internet.  
From a PC  
Sony Ericsson PC Suite must be installed in your PC and the P910i  
must be connected to the PC via SyncStation, infrared, or  
Bluetooth wireless technology in order to install applications  
from your PC.  
Installing applications in the P910i  
1. Select  
.
2. From the menu, select Applications > Install  
.
Installing applications from your PC  
3. Select the software from the list.  
1. Connect your P910i to the PC via SyncStation, infrared or  
Bluetooth wireless technology. When connected, an icon is  
shown in the status area to the right in the taskbar on the PC.  
4. Select Install. If the software is certified, an information  
dialog will be shown with the name of the software, version  
and supplier. Select Install again.  
2. Start the PC software Install Software and select the  
application (.sis file) to install. You can also open a .sis file  
directly in your PC.  
5. Now, depending on the software, you may be prompted to  
replace a previous installation, select language, memory  
location and select other installation options.  
3. Confirm to install the application in the P910i.  
4. Select target drive (phone memory or Memory Stick).  
6. Installation is complete.  
Installing applications  
141  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
deskstand and an Internet-connected PC (preferably via  
broadband).  
Removing applications from  
your P910i  
To update the P910i software  
It is sometimes necessary to remove installed applications and  
1. Connect the desk stand to your PC and place your P910i into  
user data to free up memory.  
it.  
Removing applications in the P910i  
1. Select  
2. Visit Sony Ericsson P910i support site on  
www.SonyEricsson.com/support  
.
3. Select Sony Ericsson Update Service and follow the  
instructions on how to proceed with the update sequence.  
2. From the menu, select Applications > Uninstall  
.
3. Select the application to be uninstalled.  
Answer Yes when you are asked if you want to install the Sony  
Ericsson Update Service PC program.  
4. Select Uninstall  
5. Tap Yes to confirm.  
6. Select Done  
.
Note User data can be lost when the software is updated.  
Always back up the phone before updating.  
.
Tip See also ‘Master reset’ on page 176 and ‘Storage manager’  
on page 177 in Control Panel for more options regarding removal  
of applications and user data.  
Some removed applications can be reinstalled from the PC Suite  
for the P910i and the Content and Application CD.  
Sony Ericsson Update Service  
With Sony Ericsson Update Service you can keep your phone  
updated with the latest P910i software. When a new software  
version is available, you can download and install it using the  
142  
Installing applications  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Connecting to other devices  
Your P910i can be connected to other devices with similar  
interfaces such as PCs, other P910is and handheld computers.  
PC connectivity software  
Your P910i is delivered with a CD, Sony Ericsson PC Suite. This  
software must be installed in the PC you want to connect to. See  
‘Installing applications’ on page 140 for more information. You  
do not need to install the Sony Ericsson PC Suite if you only want  
to perform beaming with the PC or use a cordless headset.  
The connection can be made via:  
Bluetooth wireless technology (not together with  
Windows 98)  
Cable  
Infrared (IrDA)  
Connection via SyncStation  
Note Bluetooth wireless technology and infrared transmitting  
are rather power consuming. Do not have them on more than  
necessary.  
Connect the SyncStation to your PC with the USB cable. A  
wizard helps you to install the USB cable the first time. The  
Sony Ericsson PC Suite CD contains the necessary software.  
Depending on the type of connection you have chosen, you can  
use your P910i to perform various tasks, for example:  
Put your P910i in the SyncStation. A new wizard starts which  
helps you to connect your P910i if this is the first time.  
appears in the status area to the right on the taskbar when  
the P910i is connected.  
Sending and receiving files via infrared or Bluetooth wireless  
technology – ‘beaming’.  
Making Backup/Restore and Synchronization of your data  
and file transfer (cable, infrared and Bluetooth wireless  
technology).  
When connecting via cable, the P910i can be set in PC Connect  
mode or Modem mode. The setting is made in Control panel >  
Connections > Cable, see ‘Cable’ on page 162.  
You can even use your P910i as a modem for Dial-Up  
Networking using cable, infrared and Bluetooth wireless  
technology. With Bluetooth wireless technology, you can for  
example, connect a cordless headset.  
Set the P910i in PC connect mode for  
Synchronization.  
Installation of software.  
Connecting to other devices  
143  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Backup and restore.  
To activate the infrared port on the PC  
1. Right click  
in the status area to the right on the taskbar.  
Set the P910i in Modem mode when using  
2. Select Properties  
P910i as a modem.  
3. Select the Infrared check box  
Dial-up network wizard.  
4. Click Close  
.
You should disable the USB cable connection in these two  
cases. In your PC select Start > Settings > Control Panel > Phone  
Monitor Options > COM Ports and disable the COM port to  
which the cable is connected.  
Note Clear the Infrared check box when ready.  
Send and receive  
You can send items via the infrared port, beam, in any  
application if there is a Send as command. To send, select  
Infrared. If you receive a beamed item, a dialog box appears with  
Connection via Infrared port  
three options: Delete  
opens the associated application which shows the item; Done  
saves it in the Beamed folder in Messages  
,
View or Done. Delete deletes the item; View  
When connecting via the infrared port, make sure that both  
devices are placed within one metre from each other and that the  
infrared ports have a free line of sight between them.  
.
Both your P910i and the device you connect to must have their  
infrared ports activated before communication can begin.  
Connection via Bluetooth  
wireless technology  
To activate the infrared port on the P910i  
1. Go to Control panel > Connections > Infrared  
.
You can connect your P910i to other products equipped with  
Bluetooth wireless technology, for example PCs, car handsfree  
devices, or other mobile phones, and exchange data. Since  
Bluetooth wireless technology is radio-based, there does not  
have to be a free line of sight between transmitting and receiving  
devices. This means that your P910i can stay in your pocket  
2. Set the P910i to PC connect or Modem as required.  
3. Set the port state to On or On for 10 minutes.  
You can also change the infrared port state with the flip closed,  
in the Connections application.  
144  
Connecting to other devices  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
while communicating. However, items between transmitting and  
receiving devices might weaken the signal.  
Pairing  
To let your P910i initiate pairing with another device, such as  
Connection to another device can be made within a range of up  
a headset  
to 10 metres. Obstructions between the transmitting devices will  
have an effect on the performance. For all tasks, except  
beaming, it is necessary that you first set up a permanent and  
1. In Control panel > Connections> Bluetooth > Settings, set Bluetooth  
to On. Make sure Visible to other devices is selected.  
trusted relationship between your P910i and the other device.  
This process is called pairing (other documentation may refer to  
it as bonding). The paired devices are remembered by your  
P910i even after you have turned it off so you do not need to  
repeat the process for every connection with those devices. The  
reason for pairing is to simplify future connections and to make  
them secure – only paired devices can connect to your P910i.  
2. Set the other device to be on or discoverable.  
3. In the Devices tab, tap Add. Your P910i searches for all  
devices in the vicinity and lists them.  
All enabled devices that are visible to others within range,  
are shown with their name and icon. You can use Show: to  
restrict the list to one category (only PC, for example).  
– Paired devices that are within range are shown with  
regular text.  
Activating Bluetooth wireless technology  
– Non-paired devices that are within range are shown with  
Activate Bluetooth wireless technology on your P910i in Control  
panel > Connections > Bluetooth > Settings. Set Bluetooth to On, and  
set if your P910i should be Visible to other devices or not. See  
‘Bluetooth’ on page 161 for more information on Bluetooth  
wireless technology settings.  
their names in italics.  
– Devices that are within range but unknown are shown  
with a preset name.  
4. Select the device you want your P910i to pair with, and enter  
a passcode when asked for it. When the passcode is accepted,  
the pairing process is complete, see ‘Passcodes’ on page 146.  
The Bluetooth wireless technology operation mode can also be  
changed with the flip closed, through the Connections  
application. When the Bluetooth wireless technology is  
5. If in the future you want to allow a paired device to connect  
to your P910i without you explicitly approving each  
connection, you should select Control panel > Connections >  
Bluetooth > Devices, then select a device and the check box  
activated,  
appears on the screen and the left indicator light  
on top of your P910i flashes blue.  
Allow to connect without confirmation  
.
Connecting to other devices  
145  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To let another device initiate pairing with your P910i  
4. In the Devices tab tap Add. Your P910i searches for all devices  
in the vicinity and lists them.  
1. In Control panel > Connections > Bluetooth > Settings, set  
Bluetooth to On  
.
5. When asked for a passcode, enter the headphone’s passcode  
on your P910i.  
2. Follow the other device’s manual to initiate pairing.  
6. If in the future you want to allow the headphone to connect to  
your P910i without you explicitly approving each  
3. When asked for a passcode, enter the same on both devices.  
4. If in the future you want to allow a paired device to connect  
to your P910i without you explicitly approving each  
connection, you should select Control panel > Connections >  
Bluetooth > Devices, select the headphone and the check box  
connection you should select Control panel > Connections >  
Bluetooth > Devices, select a device and the check box Allow to  
Allow to connect without confirmation  
.
connect without confirmation  
.
To remove a paired device from your P910i  
Select a device in the list and select Remove  
.
Tip You can change the name of a paired device. When you pair  
with other Bluetooth wireless technology enabled phones, it is  
very useful to include the user's name as part of the device  
name. This will make it very easy to beam information to the  
desired recipients.  
Passcodes  
Passcodes ensure that the device you pair with really is the  
device you think it is. A passcode is a set of numbers and/or  
letters (at least four characters) that you agree to exchange with  
the owner of the other device. Simply agree a passcode with the  
other user and each enter the same code into both devices when  
asked for it. The actual code is up to you; the important thing is  
that you both enter the same code. Accessories like headsets  
often have a default passcode, usually ‘0000’, see the specific  
user guide.  
To let a headphone initiate pairing with your P910i  
1. Check that the device you want to pair with your P910i:  
– Is on and within range.  
– Has its Bluetooth function activated and that it is in  
visible mode.  
2. In Control panel > Connections > Bluetooth > Settings, set  
Bluetooth to On  
.
3. Follow the headphone’s manual to initiate pairing on the  
headphone.  
146  
Connecting to other devices  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Send and receive  
You can send items via Bluetooth wireless technology in any  
application if there is a Send as command. To send, select  
Bluetooth. If you receive an item via Bluetooth wireless  
technology, a request dialog is shown, where you can Accept or  
Reject the transfer. If Accept is selected, a dialog box appears  
with three options: Delete  
,
View or Done. Delete deletes the item;  
View opens the associated application which shows the item;  
Done saves it in the Beamed folder in Messages  
.
Bluetooth share  
You can make it possible for other users to transfer items from  
your P910i. To make an item accessible, select Send as >  
Bluetooth Shared. The item is then copied to the Shared folder,  
accessible by other users. When a user requests to access your  
Shared folder, a request dialog is shown, where you can Accept or  
Reject the transfer.  
Connecting to other devices  
147  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Synchronization and backup  
With Sony Ericsson PC Suite installed in your PC, your P910i can  
synchronize with the following PC applications, also called  
Local synchronization  
Personal Information Managers (PIMs):  
Bluetooth  
Lotus® Organizer® 5 & 6, 6.5  
Lotus Notes® 5.0, 6  
Microsoft Outlook 98, 2000, 2002, 2003  
Microsoft Windows Address Book  
Irda  
Synchronization is divided into local and remote. Local  
synchronization is performed directly to a connected PC while  
remote synchronization is done over the air with a remote server  
in, for example, a corporate network.  
Cable  
Local synchronization is done with either cable, infrared or  
Bluetooth wireless technology. The functionality is the same.  
The manual describes the easiest way to perform the tasks but  
you can also carry out most of them by selecting Start > Programs  
> Sony Ericsson > P910i in the PC and then select the desired  
command.  
Email, Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and Jotter notes (only text)  
can be synchronized locally.  
Refer to the online help find in Help in the menu bar in the PC  
software to get more information about synchronization and  
backup.  
Local synchronization settings  
Local synchronization is initiated from the PC and all settings  
are made in the P910i PC software (included on the Sony  
Ericsson PC Suite CD).  
Note If you have imported SIM phone book entries into Contacts  
in your P910i, these entries will not be synchronized with the  
corresponding entries in your PC when synchronizing your  
P910i and PC. You will instead get duplicates in your P910i.  
148  
Synchronization and backup  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
The easiest way to synchronize is to set the Synchronization to  
automatically make a synchronization every time your P910i is  
connected.  
2. In the PC, click on  
on the PC taskbar and select  
Synchronise  
.
The synchronization starts.  
3. After a short time, the PC application you want to  
synchronize with might ask you to allow the P910i access to  
it. Answer Yes and the synchronization continues.  
To make the synchronization settings  
In the PC, click on  
in the status area to the right in the  
taskbar on the PC and select Sync Station Settings  
.
A dialog appears where you can make the synchronization  
settings. Click Help in the dialog to get more information about  
the settings.  
Remote synchronization  
Remote synchronization takes place over the air and is the ideal  
way to keep the P910i up-to-date while on the move. Using  
GPRS, the P910i can be continuously connected to the remote  
synchronization server.  
Making a local synchronization  
To make an automatic synchronization  
1. Connect your P910i via SyncStation, infrared or Bluetooth  
wireless technology. For more information, see ‘Connecting  
to other devices’ on page 143.  
GPRS, HSCSD  
or CSD  
2. Synchronization starts automatically.  
3. After a short time, the PC application you want to  
synchronize with might ask you to allow the P910i access to  
it. Answer Yes and the synchronization continues.  
PIM Application  
Sync Server  
Firewall  
To make a manual synchronization  
1. Connect your P910i via cable, infrared or Bluetooth wireless  
technology. For more information, see ‘Connecting to other  
devices’ on page 143.  
Internet/Intranet  
Synchronization and backup  
149  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Synchronization services may be offered by mobile operators,  
third-party service providers and as added capability to  
corporate PIM applications.  
3. Fill in the Task name or leave default.  
4. Fill in the Server database (contact your corporate  
information services help desk or your service provider).  
Contacts, Calendar, and Tasks can be synchronized remotely.  
5. The item you selected to be synchronized is now above the  
divider in the list. (Disabled items are below the divider.)  
6. Repeat for other items.  
Remote synchronization settings  
To configure the remote synchronization server  
Making a remote synchronization  
In Applications, select  
Remote Sync > Edit > Preferences and fill  
Open Applications > Remote Sync and tap the Sync button.  
in the following parameters:  
When ready, the Task status column shows today's date for all  
successfully synchronized items.  
– Server address  
– Username  
– Password  
You might also need to fill in whether to use transport login  
under the Protocol tab. Contact your corporate information  
services help desk or your service provider for information on  
these parameters.  
You can use the P910i Backup and Restore PC software to back up  
the contents stored in your P910i to your computer. Keeping  
backups of your P910i contents on your computer means that  
you have a separate copy of the contents of the P910i, which can  
be restored into the P910i. Backups should be made on a regular  
basis. See the online help for P910i Backup and Restore for more  
information on how to use the application.  
You also need to have at least one configured Internet account  
that remote sync can use to connect, see ‘Internet accounts’ on  
page 163.  
To select items to synchronize  
Note All user data will be deleted when the P910i software is  
upgraded by a Service Partner. Always back up your data before  
handing over the P910i for upgrading, so that you can restore it  
afterwards  
1. In Remote Sync, select one item in the list you want to be  
synchronized.  
2. Select the Enable task check box.  
150  
Synchronization and backup  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
can only be restored to the phone, and a backup from a Memory  
Stick can only be restored to a Memory Stick.  
Preconditions  
The Sony Ericsson PC Suite must be installed in the PC and the  
P910i must be connected to the PC via cable.  
To restore a backup  
Note Backup and restore does not work via infrared or  
1. Turn on your P910i and connect it to the PC via cable.  
Bluetooth wireless technology.  
2. In the PC, click on on the PC taskbar and select Back up  
and restore  
.
Performing a backup  
3. Select your P910i in the menu that appears. Several P910is  
can be backed up to the same PC.  
To make a backup  
4. Select one of the backups in the list of previously saved  
1. Turn on your P910i and connect it to the PC via cable.  
backups and click Restore  
.
2. In the PC, click on  
on the PC taskbar and select Back up  
5. Click Yes and follow the instructions in the PC and in the  
and restore  
.
P910i.  
3. Select your P910i in the menu that appears. Several P910is  
can be backed up to the same PC.  
6. The restore is complete.  
4. Select Backup and choose what to back up: P910i and/or  
Note Everything in your P910i will be overwritten by the  
chosen backup. Once you have clicked Yes to start the restore,  
you cannot cancel the procedure.  
Memory Stick.  
5. Click Yes and follow the instructions in the PC and in the  
P910i.  
Note If you have used your Secure Tokens (Secure Access files)  
since you made your backup, you must reconfigure these. If you  
restore another P910i, you must reconfigure your Secure  
Tokens. For more information see ‘Secure tokens’ on page 176.  
6. The backup is complete.  
Restoring data  
Lost data or accidentally deleted information in your P910i can  
be restored from an earlier backup. A backup from the phone  
Synchronization and backup  
151  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
SETTINGS  
Personalizing your P910i  
There are a number of ways you can give your P910i a personal  
Setting a background picture  
touch and change its settings to suit your requirements.  
You can change the background image for the standby screen in  
Control panel > Device > Display. You can use any image stored  
internally or on a Memory Stick.  
Themes  
Tip More background images can be found on the Content and  
Application CD, delivered with your P910i.  
Themes control the colour of screen and text, the icons, and the  
background picture. Sound themes control the notification  
alerts. Five themes are pre-loaded in the P910i. Extra themes  
can be found on the Content and Application CD where you also  
can use the themes editor to modify the themes or create new.  
You can obtain suitable background picture files by  
downloading, MMS, beaming using Bluetooth or infrared, or  
transferring them using a cable from your PC.  
To change the theme, select  
see ‘Themes’ on page 159  
Control panel > Device > Themes,  
Background pictures should be 208 x 208 pixels and the picture  
can be seen in the standby screen. (Any chosen picture will be  
scaled to fit the screen). The images can be JPEG, GIF, BMP,  
WBMP, MBM or PNG format.  
.
Changing your application  
shortcuts  
Setting the light intensity  
You can change and rearrange the five shortcuts to applications,  
shown in the standby screen when the flip is closed, and the five  
first shortcuts in the Application picker area in flip open (not the  
You can set the maximum and minimum display light intensity.  
This is useful to save the battery or protect your night sight  
when driving a car. See “Power tab” on page 156.  
Application launcher  
be hidden, if you wish.  
). The flip closed shortcuts can even  
152  
Personalizing your P910i  
                     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
If your network operator provides a CLI (Calling Line Identity)  
Setting a screen saver  
service, your P910i can display the contact’s picture together  
You can set a screen saver picture to be displayed after a period  
with the other information when an incoming call is received  
of inactivity. See ‘Display’ on page 155. Keylock and device  
with a CLI matching that contact (not all numbers can be  
lock may be used in combination with the screen saver. When  
displayed). The contact’s picture is also displayed when you  
you press a key or touch the screen, you will be prompted to  
make a call to that person.  
activate keys and/or enter the device lock code.  
To choose the contact’s picture size  
The images can be JPEG, GIF (including animated), BMP,  
WBMP, MBM or PNG format. Image format for the screen  
saver should be 208 x 320 pixels.  
1. Select  
Phone > Edit >Preferences > Incoming call picture.  
2. Select the Show large pop-up picture for incoming calls check  
box.  
Note Using animated GIF uses more power.  
3. Tap Done  
.
Adding images to your  
Contacts  
Ring signals  
Your P910i can play both iMelody format and polyphonic ring  
signals in WAV, AU, AMR, MIDI, RMF, and MP3 sound file  
formats. When you choose a ring signal, your P910i will scan  
the internal and Memory Stick storage and present you with a  
list of ring signals that are in these formats. Recordings you  
have made using Sound Recorder can also be selected.  
You can store a picture with  
each entry in Contacts. See  
11:03  
‘Creating and editing  
J
ohn  
S
4613244500  
mith  
contacts’ on page 108.  
+
(h)  
Pictures are easily taken  
using the CommuniCorder  
(see ‘CommuniCorder’ on  
page 64) though of course  
other images can be used.  
Ring signals can be added by downloading from the Internet,  
beaming using infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology file  
transfer from a PC and by using a Memory Stick. Extra ring  
signals can be found on the Content and Application CD. You  
can add as many ring signals as desired, subject only to  
available storage space.  
E
nd call  
Personalizing your P910i  
153  
           
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Tip Sound Recorder recordings are listed as voicenote and a  
Tasks  
Set a sound for reminder alarms. See ‘Sounds and  
number, for example voicenote1470.  
alerts’ on page 157.  
Messages  
Set a different sound for each type of message as  
notification of a new message:  
See ‘Sounds and alerts’ on page 157.  
A ring signal may be selected for an entry in Contacts, so that  
the caller can be identified by the ring signal that is played. See  
To personalize the ring melody for a contact’ on page 109.  
Note The mobile network must provide the CLI (Calling Line  
Identity) of the caller to enable the contact to be identified.  
You may change the default ring signal that is played in all other  
cases. To do this, see ‘Sounds and alerts’ on page 157.  
Note If your P910i finds that you have renamed, moved or  
deleted a ring signal, it will play the default instead.  
Alarm tones and sound  
notification  
You can choose different sounds for alarms and notifications in  
these applications:  
Time  
See ‘Setting alarms’ on page 127.  
Calendar  
Set a sound for reminder alerts, see ‘Sounds and  
alerts’ on page 157).  
154  
Personalizing your P910i  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Control panel  
The Control Panel is the location for all the main settings on  
your P910i that are system-wide and affect more than one  
application. This is the main place to go to initially set up your  
P910i, and to change settings at any point thereafter. To access  
and ‘Navigation’ on page 17. You can change the five shortcuts  
shown. If you feel that the flip closed shortcuts obscure your  
background, you can choose to have them hidden when you do  
not need them.  
it, select  
Applications >  
Control panel.  
To change an application shortcut  
Tip You can find settings that apply to a single application in  
the Preferences menu of the application, for example: Phone > Edit  
> Preferences, CommuniCorder > CommuniCorder > Preferences,  
Internet > Edit > Preferences.  
1. In the Application shortcuts dialog, select the Flip open or Flip  
closed tab depending on the shortcuts you intend to change.  
2. Select the icon you wish to change. The name of the  
application is shown in the Set application pick list.  
The sections below describe the settings available for each of  
the default items in the Control panel.  
3. Choose the application you want to replace it with from the  
list.  
To hide the flip closed application shortcuts when your P910i  
is inactive  
Clear the Shortcuts always displayed check box.  
The Device tab  
The device tab contains settings related to the behaviour of your  
P910i device itself.  
Display  
Use the Display settings to control the screen and power  
functions of your P910i.  
Application shortcuts  
Use this dialog to configure the application shortcuts shown in  
the flip closed standby view, and the Application picker  
shortcuts in the flip open mode. See ‘Standby view’ on page 15  
Control panel  
155  
             
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
screen ensures that the correct item is activated. Tap Calibrate  
screen and follow the instructions.  
Background tab  
You can set a picture to be the background for the standby  
screen.  
Power tab  
1. Select if the flip closed or flip open background should be  
You can set if the power save should switch off the screen, blank  
changed.  
the screen or show a clock on the screen. You can also set the  
power save time between 1 and 30 minutes.  
2. Tap the image showing the current picture.  
3. Browse to see picture files available on your P910i.  
If you set times for both screen saver and power saver, the  
4. Select a picture and tap Select  
.
power saver time will commence after the screen saver is  
displayed.  
Read more about background in ‘Personalizing your P910i’ on  
page 152.  
You can set the screen light settings for handheld use and car  
use.  
Screen tab  
You can set a picture to be the screen saver.  
Auto  
Light switches on when you tap the screen, press a key, or  
receive an incoming call  
On  
Off  
Light is always on  
Light is always off  
1. Select a picture for the screen saver.  
2. Set the activation time for the screen saver.  
If you select the Screen saver device lock check box the device  
lock will activate when the delay runs out. Read more about the  
device lock in ‘Device lock’ on page 43.  
Select Adjust brightness to set to set the normal (max) and  
dimmed (min) light intensity for handheld use and car use. The  
Brightness box works as a slider.  
If you set a time for the Automatic input lock, the keyboard lock  
will activate when the time runs out. Read more about the  
automatic keylock in ‘Automatic keylock’ on page 44.  
Occasionally you may find that you tap one item (for example a  
button or menu option) but another is activated. Calibrating the  
156  
Control panel  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
On the Location tab  
Flight mode  
Set Current country/region and Current city to your current  
In flight mode the radio function is turned off. You cannot make  
and receive calls but most of the other functions in the P910i are  
available.  
location.  
Set Other country/region and Other city to an alternative  
location (for example your home location if you are abroad).  
Use these settings to turn the flight mode on or off and also to  
activate the Power menu. When activated, the Power menu will  
ask you if you want to start the P910i in normal mode or flight  
mode each time you turn on the P910i. Also, when you press the  
On/Off button when your P910i is on, the Power menu will ask  
you if you want to turn off the P910i, or switch to another mode.  
If the city you want is not listed, select another city in the  
desired time zone.  
On the Numbers tab  
Set the decimal separator and thousands separator you desire.  
To activate the Power menu  
Select the Prompt me... check box and tap Done  
.
Locks  
Locks contains options for activating the locks on the device,  
the SIM card and the keys on the keypad, and for changing the  
lock codes, see ‘P910i locks’ on page 42.  
To cancel the selection of Power menu  
Clear the Prompt me... check box and tap Done  
.
International  
Sounds and alerts  
Use these settings to set the locations shown in  
Time, as well  
Use these settings to control sounds and alerts of your P910i.  
as the units for distances, numerical separators, and how  
currency values should be shown.There are two tabs: Location  
and Numbers.  
Calls tab – Sets ring tones and volume.  
Messages tab – Sets notification alerts for messages.  
Other tab – Sets button and screen clicks, reminders, alarms,  
and other notifications.  
Control panel  
157  
             
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
You can choose to use any sound recording or audio file. You can  
Calls tab  
select ring signals that are stored on your local storage or on a  
These settings set incoming call alerts. For more information see  
Memory Stick. If the selected file is later deleted or moved, the  
‘Ring signals’ on page 153.  
Default Melody will be played instead.  
You may personalize the ring melodies further for individual  
contacts, see ‘To change the details of a contact’ on page 110.  
To listen to the selected ringtone or alert  
1. Tap the icon to listen to the signal.  
Ring (voice) – Select a ring signal for incoming voice calls.  
2. Tap again to stop playback.  
Ring (voice) line 2 – Select a ring signal for incoming voice  
calls.  
To change the default ring tone or alert  
Ring (data) – Select a ring signal for incoming data calls.  
1. Tap the drop-down menu.  
2. Select Default Melody for the P910i default or Find sound to  
Ring volume – Set the preferred sound level for handheld,  
handsfree and car use.  
select a new one.  
3. If required, change folder.  
4. Select the required sound  
Increasing ring – Select the checkbox to use increasing ring  
signals. This disables the other volume settings.  
5. Tap  
and  
to preview the sound.  
Messages tab  
6. Tap Select to set this sound.  
These settings set messaging alerts.  
Warning! The volume may be uncomfortably loud at the  
higher volume levels if the phone is close to your ear. Exposure  
to excessive volume may damage hearing.  
Display notification message – Select the check box to receive  
notification of a received message.  
Note To set vibrating alert, silent mode, speakerphone or mute  
the microphone, tap the volume icon on the status bar.  
SMS – Select an alert for received SMS messages.  
Email – Select an alert for received Email messages.  
MMS – Select an alert for received MMS messages.  
158  
Control panel  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Area info – Select an alert for received area information  
messages.  
Use the settings on the Primary  
set methods for entering text in your P910i.  
,
Alternative and Flip Closed tabs to  
Auto setup – Select an alert for auto setup messages.  
Primary  
The method that you select here is activated  
automatically when you need to enter text into your  
P910i.  
Other tab  
Alternative  
Flip closed  
The method that you select here is activated if you  
These settings set button and screen clicks, reminders, alarms,  
and other notifications.  
tap  
at the bottom of the screen.  
The method that you select here is activated when you  
need to enter text with the flip closed.  
Button click – Select the sound used when you press a key on  
the keypad.  
If you load other text input software, select it and adjust its  
settings here.  
Screen tap – Select the sound used when you tap the screen.  
Key press – Select the sound used when you press a key on  
the keyboard on the flips inside.  
Themes  
Reminder – Select an alert to be played for reminders.  
You can set the look of the user interface by changing the theme.  
Voice messages – Select an alert to be played for voice  
messages.  
To change the theme, select a theme from the list. The picture  
shows the flip closed standby background. Tap Select  
.
Default alarm – Select the default alarm sound.  
To listen to a theme sound, select the event from the drop-  
down list. Tap the icon to play. Tap again to stop playback.  
Text input  
To send a theme, select the theme and tap Send as  
.
There are several standard ways of entering text in your P910i.  
See ‘Entering text with the Flip closed’ on page 32 and  
‘Entering text with the Flip open’ on page 35.  
To delete a theme, select the theme and tap Delete  
.
Control panel  
159  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
2. Select the am/pm box.  
Time & date  
This is only possible if you use the 12-hour time format.  
Adjusting the time and date here sets these throughout your  
P910i.  
3. Confirm by tapping outside the time picker.  
If the locations you have set under  
Control panel >  
The dialog has three tabs. You can set:  
International are in a country/region that currently has  
summertime (daylight saving time), you can adjust the time and  
date.  
Time & date  
The current time and date. Here you can also turn  
Summertime (daylight saving time) on or off for your  
location.  
Format  
Specify how you want the time and date to be displayed  
on the screen.  
To turn daylight saving time on  
1. On the Time &date tab, select Summertime, select the check  
Workdays  
Specify the days in your working week.  
boxes for the zones that currently have daylight saving time.  
2. Select Done  
.
Note These settings are also available in the  
Time  
application.  
Format tab  
Time & date tab  
You can specify how you want the time and date to be displayed  
on the screen, and if you want to use the 12-hour (am/pm) or 24-  
hour time format.  
To set the current date  
1. On the Time & date tab, select the date. A calendar view opens.  
To set the time and date display format  
1. Select Date format and choose a format.  
2. Select Date separator and choose a separator.  
Tap the arrows to set the current year and month.  
2. Select the current date.  
To set the current time  
3. Select a Time format  
4. Select Time separator choose a separator.  
5. Select Done  
.
1. On the Time & date tab, select the time. Select the upper half of  
the hour or minute box to increase the number displayed, or  
the lower half to decrease the number.  
.
160  
Control panel  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
connecting to other devices using Bluetooth wireless technology  
in ‘Connection via Bluetooth wireless technology’ on page 144.  
Workdays tab  
You can specify what days you work, if, for example, you want  
to set an alarm that sounds only on workdays. You can also  
specify the first day of your week to customize the display of  
both Week and Month views in Calendar.  
Bluetooth settings are shown on two tabs:  
Settings  
Devices  
• A device name for your P910i.  
• Bluetooth on or off.  
• If it should be visible to other Bluetooth equipped  
devices.  
User greeting  
A list of all the Bluetooth-enabled devices that your  
P910i is paired (bonded) with.  
Your P910i can show a user greeting on the standby screen when  
you turn it on. Use this dialog to turn this function on or off. You  
can define your own user greeting text (up to 32 characters).  
• To change the name of a device, and to allow for  
connection without confirmation, select the name in  
the list.  
• To remove a device from the list, select the name and  
select Remove  
• To locate other devices in the vicinity, and add them to  
the list, tap Add  
.
.
The Connections tab  
The connections tab contains settings related to how your P910i  
communicates with other devices.  
Tip You will probably find that the preset name of your P910i,  
and of devices you pair it with, are not very meaningful or easily  
recognisable. It is a good idea to change these names to  
something more useful. The name you choose for your P910i  
appears on any devices you pair it with.  
Bluetooth  
Bluetooth wireless technology uses radio waves to enable  
wireless connections between your P910i and other Bluetooth-  
enabled devices. This method of linking works well at a range of  
up to 10 metres. Obstructions between the transmitting devices  
will have an effect on the performance. Read more about  
See ‘Pairing’ on page 145 for instructions on how to connect to  
another device using Bluetooth wireless technology.  
Control panel  
161  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Set the baud rate, parity, number of stop bits, character length  
and type of flow control required for the connection. When  
connecting your P910i via the desk stand to a USB port on  
your PC, use the following (default) settings:  
Security  
On the Settings tab you can set the Bluetooth security related  
settings of your P910i.  
Bluetooth on  
All Bluetooth wireless technology functionality from  
your P910i works. Visibility according to the Visible  
to other devices setting.  
Set Bluetooth to Off if you do not use Bluetooth, it  
will decrease battery drain. Bluetooth will  
automatically switch on if you use Send as >  
Bluetooth from the applications  
Baud rate  
115200  
None  
1
8
Parity  
Stop bits  
Character length  
Flow control  
CTS/RTS  
Tip You can set the cable connection mode when the flip is  
closed by selecting  
Visible to  
other devices  
Selected: All Bluetooth wireless technology  
functionality from your P910i works.  
Cleared: All Bluetooth wireless technology  
functionality from your P910i works but you cannot  
receive beamed items, and other devices cannot  
initiate pairing with your P910i.  
Applications >  
Connections >  
Cable.  
GSM Networks  
This option lets you choose what network to use when you are  
outside your operator’s area. Choose if you want to search for a  
new network or use a preferred one. You can also make a list of  
preferred networks.  
Cable  
Use Cable to set the cable connection mode and the connection  
parameters used when communicating through your P910i's  
cable port.  
Search mode – Select between automatic or manual search for  
a network.  
Set the cable connection mode. Please note that you must set  
the mode to Modem when using the P910i as a modem and  
when using the DUN (Dial-up Networking) Wizard.  
Select network – Tap the button to get a list of available  
networks.  
New search – Tap the button to search for available networks.  
162  
Control panel  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Preferred list – Show the networks that your P910i will search  
for when you are outside your home network.  
P910i automatically uses to access the Internet. You need to set  
up an Internet account before you can:  
Note Your operator may not allow you to access all available  
networks.  
Access Web pages and download multimedia messages.  
Set up an email account to send and receive email messages.  
To add a network to the preferred list  
Tip A simple way of setting up an Internet account is to ask  
your service provider to send you a message that contains the  
required information to create an account automatically on your  
P910i.  
1. Tap Add network  
.
2. Select a network from the displayed list.  
3. Select a position in the Preferred list and tap Done  
.
There are three types of Internet account:  
Dial-up  
:
For Dial-Up (CSD, Circuit Switched Data)  
connections, you are charged for the length of  
time that you are connected to the Internet.  
Infrared  
Use this setting to control the state of the infrared port of your  
P910i.  
High-Speed Dial-Up  
:
For High-Speed Dial-Up (HSCSD, High Speed  
Circuit Switched Data) connections you are  
charged for the length of time you are  
Set the infrared status to PC connect or Modem, as required.  
connected but you can increase the connection  
speed so that information is transferred faster.  
You can set it Off On or On for 10 minutes. Read more about  
connecting to other devices using infrared in ‘Connection via  
Infrared port’ on page 144.  
,
The service must be included in your  
subscription and billing rates from your  
network operator may increase as you increase  
the connection speed.  
Internet accounts  
GPRS  
:
For a GPRS connection you are charged for the  
amount of information you view, download, or  
send.  
You access the Internet using an Internet Service Provider (ISP),  
who supplies you with account details including: a username, a  
password, and the phone number or Web site address that your  
The dialog has two tabs: Accounts and Other.  
Control panel  
163  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Accounts tab  
New  
GPRS account  
The Internet accounts dialog lists all the Internet accounts that  
have been set up on your P910i.  
For some accounts you may need to make advanced settings,  
provided by your ISP. Select Advanced and enter settings on the  
tabs as described below  
You can add a New account to the list and Edit or Delete an  
existing account.  
GPRS Advanced tabs  
Server  
Username and password required  
If you want to select an Internet account every time you connect  
to the Internet, select the Show connection dialog check box. This  
may be useful if you use different Internet accounts for  
Normally, you do not have to enter a username and  
password when you connect to a GPRS account.  
However, some service providers may require you to  
enter these details.  
Internet and  
Messages.  
If you select the Username and password required  
check box, but do not enter a username and  
password, you will be prompted to enter these when  
the P910i connects.  
Whenever you connect to the Internet, your Preferred account is  
the account that your P910i prompts you to use.  
To create a new Internet account  
Address  
1. On the Accounts tab, select New  
.
Enter the Internet address of your access point. The  
address is supplied by your service provider.  
2. Give the account a name. This will be the name shown in  
your list of accounts. (In dialogs that appear while a  
connection is being established the text -GPRS is  
automatically added to names of GPRS accounts.)  
3. Choose the Connection type for the type of account that you  
want to create, GPRS or Dial-up.  
4. Continue entering settings as required. These will differ  
depending on the type of account: GPRS, Dial-up or High-  
Speed Dial-Up:  
164  
Control panel  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
GPRS Advanced tabs  
GPRS Advanced tabs  
Log in  
The settings on this tab deal with IP and DNS  
addresses.  
Authentication is used by some network operators to  
identify the mobile phone connecting to their GPRS  
network. There are different methods, or protocols,  
for doing this.  
The DNS address uniquely identifies your Internet  
Service Provider (ISP)'s computers, which your  
P910i uses to connect to the Internet. Your P910i can  
normally fetch these addresses automatically from  
most ISPs.  
If, after setting up an Internet account, you cannot  
connect to the Internet and you suspect these  
addresses are incorrect, ask your ISP for their  
primary and secondary DNS addresses.  
An IP address consists of four 3-digit boxes and valid  
input is between 000 and 255 in each box.  
Normal: PAP (Password Authentication Protocol).  
The user's username and password are transmitted  
over the network in an unencrypted form.  
Secure: CHAP (Challenge Handshake  
Authentication Protocol). The user's username and  
password are never transmitted over the network.  
None: No authentication is required by the network  
operator.  
QoS  
Check with your network operator before changing  
any of the QoS (Quality of Service) settings.  
Proxy  
Other  
A proxy server is a computer connected between  
your P910i and the computer you communicate with.  
This arrangement can be used for connections to  
Remote Sync servers, or within a company network.  
If this setting is needed, your company's Information  
Services department or Remote Sync provider must  
give you instructions.  
The settings Precedence Delay, Peak rate, and Mean  
,
rate are all by default set to Subscribed, which means  
that your operators default QoS (Quality of Service)  
values will apply. Reliability is set as Class 3 by  
default.  
New  
Dial-Up or High-Speed Dial-Up account  
If your ISP supports Point to Point Protocol (PPP)  
extensions, you can select the Enable PPP extensions  
check box. PPP extensions allow your P910i to  
provide features such as encryption, which increases  
the security of your Internet connection.  
Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supplies you with your User  
name, your Password, and their Phone number, which your P910i  
dials to connect to the Internet. If you have a High-Speed Dial-  
Up account with your network operator you can increase the  
speed of your connection by making settings on the Speed tab  
under Advanced  
.
Control panel  
165  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Tip To avoid having to change the phone number when you  
travel abroad: enter the international dialling prefix (for  
example '+') and the appropriate country code for your ISP.  
Dial-Up and High-Speed Dial-Up Advanced tabs  
Select the check box Post connect terminal if:  
• The login script of the account that you are setting up  
requires that you input certain information or you will  
need to respond to prompts from the Internet accounts.  
You are connecting to a Dial-Up account that uses Secure  
Access generated by a separate smart card or password  
generator.  
For some accounts you may also need to make advanced  
settings.  
Select Advanced and enter settings on the tabs as described  
below  
Proxy  
Speed  
For an explanation of these settings, see Proxy in the  
‘GPRS Advanced tabs’ on page 164.  
Dial-Up and High-Speed Dial-Up Advanced tabs  
Log in  
The settings on this tab deal with IP and DNS addresses.  
For an explanation of these settings, see Log in in the  
‘GPRS Advanced tabs’ on page 164.  
You can only increase the speed of your connection if you  
have a High-Speed Dial-Up account with your network  
operator.  
Script  
As an alternative to entering your username and password  
to access the Internet you may need to use a login script  
stored on your P910i. Although uncommon, scripts may  
be required by your Internet Service Provider (ISP).  
Select the Use log in script check box and enter the script  
Secure  
To enable secure access for this Internet account you  
must link it to a vendor-associated Secure Token in this  
dialog:  
1. Select the Enable secure access check box.  
To create or delete Secure Tokens on your P910i, select  
text in the Script editor  
.
Control panel > Other >Secure tokens  
.
If you select the check box Plain text authentication  
(required by some ISPs), the security of your connection  
will decrease during the connection process. Once you  
are connected, the security of your connection will be  
restored.  
2. Select the vendor and token names of the Secure Token  
that you want to link to this account from the drop-down  
lists.  
Other  
If your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supports Point to  
Point Protocol (PPP) extensions, you can select the  
Enable PPP extensions check box. PPP extensions allow  
your P910i to provide features such as encryption, which  
increases the security of your Internet connection.  
166  
Control panel  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To edit an Internet account  
not receive incoming calls. As soon as the transfer stops  
(Icon: ) incoming calls will be accepted.  
1. On the Accounts tab, select the account in the list.  
2. Select Edit  
3. Change your settings as desired.  
4. Select Done  
.
Setting the Preferred mode lets you choose how you want to use  
your P910i:  
.
Select GPRS only if you do not want to be disturbed by  
incoming phone calls while browsing the Web. All incoming  
voice (and GSM data) calls are rejected. If you disconnect  
from the Internet, incoming calls can be received. Outgoing  
calls are possible, except during data transfer. This mode is  
useful if you are using sensitive Internet services, such as  
banking.  
Note If you change the Connection type, all account data for that  
account will be deleted.  
To delete an Internet account  
1. On the Accounts tab, select the account in the list.  
2. Select Delete  
3. Select Yes  
.
If you select GSM only, your P910i will not be connected to  
the GPRS network. If you choose to download email or  
browse the Web, your P910i will connect to GPRS only as  
long as is needed for the data connection.  
.
Other tab  
If you select Automatic, your P910i will let you answer  
incoming GSM calls while having normal GPRS  
functionality. A GPRS data connection will be temporarily  
interrupted by a voice call.  
You can use the Dial-up timeout and GPRS timeout settings to set up  
your P910i to disconnect automatically from the Internet, if you  
are not using it. The connection is broken after the period you  
specify has lapsed.  
Preferred mode (bearer preference)  
Please note that your P910i can be used for either voice (or  
GSM data) calls or transferring GPRS data, but not both at the  
same time. It may, however, still be connected to GPRS. As an  
Messaging accounts  
The  
Messages application can handle many different types  
of messages, but you must first set up accounts and make  
settings as described below.  
example, during GPRS data transfer (Icon:  
) your P910i may  
Control panel  
167  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
The Messaging accounts dialog has four tabs, one for each type  
of messaging account:  
Email tab  
The Email tab shows a list of the email accounts on your  
P910i.You can add a New account to the list and Edit or Delete an  
existing account.  
Email  
You can have any number of email accounts. To receive  
and send email, you must first set up an Internet account  
(if one is not already set up). See ‘Internet accounts’ on  
page 163.  
You can choose one of your email accounts as Preferred. This  
will be the email account that your P910i uses when you use  
Send as to send an entry as email directly from one of your P910i  
applications  
SMS  
MMS  
You can only have one SMS (Short Message Service)  
account.The settings on this tab also apply to EMS  
(Extended Message Service) messages.  
You can only have one MMS (Multimedia Messaging  
Service) account. To receive MMS messages you must  
first set up Internet and WAP accounts (if not already set  
up). See‘Internet accounts’ on page 163.  
To create a new email account  
1. On the Email tab, select New.  
2. Enter the following settings on the tabs:  
Area  
You can only have one Area info account. The number of  
Area Information channels that you can subscribe to is  
limited by the space on your SIM.  
Email account basic tab settings  
Account name  
Your name  
This is the name you give to your email account.  
This name appears on your outgoing email  
messages.  
Tip A simple way of setting up an email or multimedia message  
account is to ask your service provider to send you a message  
that contains the required information to create an account  
automatically on your P910i.  
Email address  
Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supplies you  
with your email address.  
Connection type  
Select POP3 or IMAP. POP3 is most common.  
IMAP makes it possible to subscribe to server  
based folders.  
Read more about the different types of messages in ‘Messages’  
on page 91.  
Internet account  
Select the Internet account to access your email  
messages.  
168  
Control panel  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Email account Inbox tab settings  
Email account Outbox tab settings  
Username  
Password  
Incoming server  
address  
Outgoing server  
address  
Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supplies you  
with your username, your password, and its  
incoming server address, which identifies the  
computer where your incoming email messages  
are stored.  
Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supplies you  
with its Outgoing server address, which identifies  
the computer through which your outgoing email  
messages are sent.  
Use SMTP  
Some SMTP servers might also require  
authentication  
Open in full  
screen  
Select to open messages in full screen portrait  
view.  
authentication when sending email. In that case,  
select the check box Use SMTP authentication and  
enter your User name and Password  
.
Download  
If you want to limit the data traffic, you can choose  
to receive just Just headers (the sender, subject,  
and date only) or set a size limit (if a message is  
larger than the Emails Smaller than limit, only the  
headers are downloaded). You can download the  
complete message later. You can also set a limit to  
the total number of messages held in your email  
account at any one time.  
Use Inbox login  
details  
If the SMTP server accepts using your Inbox login  
information for authentication, select the check  
box Use Inbox login details  
.
Email account Advanced tab settings  
Secure  
connection  
Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) will tell you  
whether you can use either a Secure connection or  
Secure password authentication  
.
Schedule  
Select Schedule download to schedule an  
automatic download of your incoming email  
messages. Messages that are waiting in your  
Outbox will not be sent at the same time.  
Outgoing mail  
port  
Normally 25. Do not change unless your ISP  
instructs you to.  
Use MIME  
encoding  
MIME encoding is a standard that allows non-  
textual information (for example graphics) and  
accented characters to be sent in email messages.  
If you should not wish to Use MIME encoding  
,
clear the check box.  
Control panel  
169  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
SMS tab  
Email account Advanced tab settings  
Incoming mail  
port  
Normally 110. Do not change unless your ISP  
instructs you to.  
Use these settings to set up text messaging and EMS  
messaging:  
Secure  
password  
authentication  
A secure connection means that all information  
(including your username, password, and all  
messages) is encrypted to maximize security while  
you are connected to the Internet. In contrast,  
secure password authentication means that only  
your password is encrypted.  
Messaging accounts SMS tab settings  
SMS Service  
centre address  
The SMS Service centre address is the phone  
number where your text messages are stored. It is  
normally imported from the SIM card but if that  
fails, your network operator can provide you with  
the service centre address.  
To edit an email account  
Character set  
Your network operator may also specify the  
Character set  
.
1. On the Email tab, select the account in the list.  
Messages stored  
for  
You can set a time limit after which text messages  
are deleted from the network by choosing a value  
in the Messages stored for list.  
2. Select Edit  
3. Change your settings as desired.  
4. Select Done  
.
.
Connection type  
Specify if you prefer to use GPRS or GSM  
connection as directed by your network operator.  
To delete an email account  
Tip If you send and receive text messages in several countries,  
you can avoid having to change the service centre address when  
you travel abroad by entering the international dialling prefix  
(for example '+') and the appropriate country code for your  
network operator.  
1. On the Email tab, select the account in the list.  
2. Select Delete  
3. Select Yes  
.
.
170  
Control panel  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Advanced settings  
Select Advanced to make settings about how your P910i will  
send and receive multimedia messages.  
MMS tab  
Use these settings to set up multimedia messaging:  
Messaging accounts MMS tab settings  
MMS Advanced settings tabs  
Service centre  
address  
The MMS Service centre address is the URL to the  
server on which your multimedia messages are  
stored. Your MMS service provider or your network  
operator can provide you with the service centre  
address.  
Send  
The values you give these settings will be default for all  
multimedia messages that you send. You can of course  
choose other values for an individual message in Messages.  
You can set the Validity period for your messages, that is,  
how long they should be available to the receiver.  
Maximum is the default.  
WAP account  
Automatic  
Specify which of your configured WAP accounts  
you wish to use.  
WAP accounts are created in Control panel >  
Connections > WAP accounts  
You can give your messages a Priority of Low  
,
Normal  
(default) or High  
.
You can set Content alert for the multimedia messages you  
create to help you check content.  
Select between:  
Off - automatic download is off, you will receive  
notifications of incoming messages and have to  
download them manually.  
Home only - messages are downloaded  
automatically when you are connected to your  
home network.  
If you select Warning, a warning message is displayed  
whenever you add a non-conformant item to a multimedia  
message. You have the option to send anyway. If you select  
Restricted, the message will not be sent in the situation  
described above. Free means no restrictions.  
On - messages are also downloaded automatically  
when you are roaming outside your home network.  
Select the check boxes to provide the function you want:  
Hide number prevents the sent message from showing your  
number.  
Read report requests a read notification from receivers of  
your messages.  
Delivery report requests a delivery notification from  
receivers of your messages.  
Reply with history includes the original with your reply.  
Set whether or not to have a size limit for incoming  
messages:  
Download size  
and  
Smaller than  
No restrictions - the size of the incoming messages  
does not matter, all messages will be received.  
Smaller than - messages smaller than the limit will  
be received, bigger messages will be deflected.  
Control panel  
171  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Area Information is a type of text message that is sent to all  
subscribers in a certain network area, for example a local traffic  
report.  
MMS Advanced settings tabs  
Receive  
These settings apply to multimedia messages that you  
receive.  
Select the Play full screen checkbox, when you want to  
play MMS messages in full screen.  
Select the check boxes to send a notification message to the  
sender when a message is:  
To enable Cell Information  
Select the Cell information check box  
To turn Area Information on  
• Delivered to you: Allow delivery notification  
• Read by you: Allow read notification  
1. Check the Area information check box. Received messages  
will be automatically stored, and displayed in the list when  
dismissed.  
You can filter reception of incoming messages by message  
type (Advertisements Information) or from senders not  
,
listed in Contacts (Anonymous senders). Selecting a check  
box will filter out messages of that category.  
To receive multimedia messages only from senders listed  
in your Contacts, select all other check boxes and clear the  
2. The list shows all the channels that you have defined on your  
P910i. The check box for each channel shows if it is on  
(selected, ready to receive messages) or off (cleared, not  
active):  
check box for Anonymous senders  
.
To add a new channel  
Area tab  
1. Select New  
.
On the Area tab you make settings related to Cell Broadcast  
Services. These include both Area Information and Cell  
Information services. The availability of Cell and Area  
Information Services is operator-dependent.  
2. Enter the number of the new channel in the New Channel  
dialog. Channel numbers can be from 0 to 999. If there are  
too many channels defined, New will be disabled and you will  
see a message: Maximum channels on SIM  
.
Your network may broadcast the area code as cell information.  
Your P910i can display it below the network name in the flip  
closed standby view.  
Channel numbering is operator-dependent. Please consult  
your network operator for information.  
To turn a channel on or off  
Select the channel in the list and select the check box. To turn it  
off, clear the check box.  
172  
Control panel  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To delete a channel  
Note You access WAP pages through an Internet Service  
Provider (ISP) so, when you create a WAP account, you must  
choose one of your existing Internet accounts or first create a  
new one.  
Select Delete. Since deleting a channel cannot be undone, you  
will be asked to confirm the delete. Deleting the channel will  
also delete any stored Area Information messages for that  
channel in your Area Info Inbox.  
To create a new WAP account  
1. Enter the name of the WAP account.  
2. Select the Internet account you want to use. Preferred  
WAP accounts  
indicates the account set as preferred in the Internet setup.  
Use these settings to set up and manage WAP accounts on your  
P910i.  
3. If you are going to use a WAP gateway or a proxy, select the  
Use Proxy check box.  
WAP accounts are intended for multimedia messages and for  
accessing the Internet through a WAP gateway. (Such gateways  
make use of proxy port 9200-9203.) All other proxy settings  
should be included in your Internet accounts.  
4. Enter the Address of the gateway or proxy.  
5. Enter the Port of the gateway or proxy.  
For a WAP gateway use:  
9201 for a normal connection.  
For security reasons, some WAP pages and services, for  
example online banking, can only be accessed from a particular  
WAP account.  
9203 for an encrypted secure connection.  
6. If the gateway/proxy requires Username and Password, which  
is very unusual, fill in the last two fields in the dialog.  
The dialog has two tabs: Basic and Preferred.  
Preferred tab  
Select the check box to set a preferred WAP account. It will be  
used when you use the Open page command in the  
application and when a page is opened from another P910i  
application. If you do not set a preferred WAP account, the  
preferred Internet account will be used when connecting to the  
Internet.  
Basic tab  
The dialog shows a list of all the WAP accounts on your P910i.  
You can add a New account to the list and Edit or Delete an  
existing account.  
Internet  
Control panel  
173  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Security information  
The Other tab  
Security information is displayed when Certificate manager  
The other tab contains all settings that are not related to the  
cannot be sure of the origin of the page or software. For  
device or connections. This is also where settings from system  
example, security information will be displayed if:  
components and add-ons, developed by third-party developers,  
will be found.  
The certificate on a page has expired.  
The identity of a software manufacturer cannot be verified.  
Security information is also displayed when a certificate on your  
P910i has:  
Certificate manager  
Digital certificates ensure that the Web or WAP pages you visit,  
or any software you install, really are created by the person you  
expect.  
Expired.  
Been revoked by the independent organization that issued it.  
Certificates may be present on the pages that you view or the  
software that you download. Your P910i compares these  
certificates with a set of certificates that are stored in Certificate  
manager to ensure the authenticity of the page or software. If the  
certificates do not match, your P910i informs you, and gives you  
the following choices:  
Adding and deleting certificates  
Your P910i handles certificates automatically so, most of the  
time, you can browse the Internet securely without using  
Certificate manager. If you do need to add or delete a certificate,  
you will usually be informed by your network operator or  
system administrator. You should delete a certificate from  
Certificate manager if you are informed, or suspect, that:  
Prevent the page being loaded or the software being installed.  
Continue at your own risk.  
The certificate does not belong to the person who supplied it.  
The certificates on your P910i have been created and issued by  
an independent organization that ensures their authenticity.  
The certificate was issued incorrectly by the independent  
organization that created it.  
174  
Control panel  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
When you format a disk, you delete all the information on it,  
including any applications that you may have installed. You also  
delete all information placed on it by other devices (these  
folders are hidden except in File Manager).  
Type of certificate  
The type can be either User or Certificate Authority  
.
User certificates contain your identity. This type of certificate  
is used when the server asks for client authentication. The  
client application requests you to identify yourself by  
choosing a user certificate.  
IP Security manager  
The IP security manager displays stored policies and only one  
policy can be activated at a time.This is used for secure  
connections over the Internet, typically to a corporate intranet. If  
needed, your company information services department will  
supply the necessary information.  
Certificate Authority certificates contain server details. This  
type of certificate is handled by your P910i when the server  
only requires server authentication. This means that your  
identity remains anonymous.  
There are two types of passwords needed:  
Flip settings  
IP security password: is to be set when activating the very  
first policy, that is, this password is only set once, but it is  
possible to change it later at any time by tapping the  
Password button.  
Flip keyboard - Specify the keyboard your P910i has on the inside  
of the flip.  
Enable virtual flip - Select the check box to use of the Virtual flip  
when the flip of your P910i has been removed.  
Activation password: is needed when a policy is activated  
for the first time and the supplier of the policy gives this.  
Format disk  
Language selection  
This dialog primarily lets you rename and format any Memory  
Stick that you install in your P910i. Your P910i comes with one  
Memory Stick.  
Use this list of all languages stored on your P910i to change  
language. The highlighted entry is the language presently in use.  
Control panel  
175  
             
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To conserve storage space only a limited set of languages is  
loaded on your P910i at delivery. When you select one of the  
languages from the list the unused languages in the set are  
deleted from the memory of your P910i.  
log in to that network to use secure access and generate the  
required one-time password when you make the connection.  
Your P910i supports the following secure access systems:  
SecureID from RSA  
SafeWord from Secure Computing  
Master reset  
It is also possible to add other access systems through third-  
Use Master reset to reset your P910i.  
Note All user data, as well as pre-installed media files and  
application data files (including, for example, backgrounds,  
ring signals and pictures), will be deleted and settings will be set  
to the state they were, after you selected the language. The  
selected local language will be restored.  
If you have a separate device or application that requires one-  
time passwords according to one of these systems, you do not  
need a separate hardware token generator (Hard Token). Your  
P910i can generate passwords that are not associated with an  
Internet account.  
If you have backed up your user data, you can restore it from the  
backup, see ‘Restoring data’ on page 151.  
You manage secure access in your P910i using Secure Tokens.  
Each token is associated with one vendor/system and may be  
associated with one or more Internet accounts (or none, when  
you use your P910i as a Hard Token). You can configure as  
many tokens as needed.  
You can restore media files and application data files from the  
Content and Application CD, or from the Web.  
If you want to keep installed applications, clear the Delete user  
installed applications check box.  
Tip Dialog details when using secure access are vendor, system  
and network-specific. You should contact the administrator of  
the network you wish to access to get the correct information.  
Secure tokens  
If you need access to a network that requires secure access  
(often known as ‘strong authentication’), for example a  
corporate intranet, you can set up the Internet account you use to  
176  
Control panel  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
delete unwanted files, and launch the appropriate application to  
view or play a file in the list.  
Storage manager  
The list shows the applications on your P910i and the space they  
occupy. Tapping the Files button lets you manage general files  
stored internally on the P910i or on a Memory Stick.  
To delete files or copy files between folders  
1. Select Files.  
2. Select the Type of file to move or delete.  
3. Select the Location folder.  
Deleting information from applications  
To delete information from an application: select an application  
in the list. This application is then displayed. Delete the old or  
unwanted entries or information.  
4. Tap one or more check boxes to select the files to copy or  
delete.  
5. To copy files, tap Copy and select the destination folder.  
Here are some housekeeping tips for different applications:  
To delete files, tap Delete. You will be asked to confirm.  
Delete any unwanted recordings as even short ones occupy a  
lot of space.  
Uninstalling applications  
If you uninstall an application, you can always reinstall it if you  
want to use it later.  
In  
Messages, delete any old messages from your Inbox or  
Sent folders.  
In  
Calendar, delete all entries in a specified time period by  
To uninstall applications  
selecting Calendar > Remove entries in your list of entries.  
1. Select Uninstall.  
In  
Tasks, delete all completed entries by selecting  
A list of applications that can be uninstalled is shown.  
Tasks > Delete completed in your list of entries.  
2. Select the application to uninstall.  
Throughout your P910i, use folders as you create and receive  
information to speed up housekeeping later.  
3. Select Uninstall.  
Deleting or copying general files  
Tap Files to see lists of all stored general file types on your P910i  
and the Memory Stick. You can copy files to a specified folder,  
Control panel  
177  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To change the PIN code  
WIM PIN settings  
1. Select the PIN you want to change from the choice list.  
WIM (WAP Identity Module) is used for performing security  
2. Select Change PIN  
.
functions, especially to store and process information needed for  
user identification and authentication. It is a tamper-resistant  
store for private keys, certificates and other items that may  
require a PIN for access or modification.  
If a PIN code has been blocked, you must unblock it before it  
can be used again. Select the PIN and select Change PIN  
.
The WIM management dialog consists of a PIN choice list and a  
WIM items list.  
You can select a PIN from the PIN choice list. The WIM items  
list changes content dynamically, displaying only the keys that  
are protected by the selected PIN and also have an associated  
certificate. Other keys that are protected by the selected PIN but  
do not have an associated certificate are not shown in the WIM  
item list. This is the case when WIM PIN (PIN-G) is selected.  
Note The PIN-G applies to the whole WIM and any items that  
do not have a different PIN. This means that no specific items on  
the WIM are linked to PIN-G.  
You can change status of a PIN:  
Enable PIN A PIN code that is enabled is requested for  
authorisation of an operation. To proceed with the operation  
you must enter the PIN code.  
Disable PIN A PIN code that is disabled is not requested to  
authorize an operation to proceed.  
178  
Control panel  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Getting started with Internet and Messages  
Connection type  
When your P910i connects to a service provider, it will use a  
GSM or GPRS network provided by a network operator. Many  
network operators offer both GPRS and GSM services.  
Introduction  
Before you can use  
Internet and  
Messages to access the  
Internet and send or receive messages, you will need to make  
some user-specific settings in the  
Control Panel.  
The connection type defines which network your account uses  
to connect to the Internet. GPRS Internet accounts use the GPRS  
network, and Dial-Up Internet accounts use the GSM network.  
Service provider  
You will need a service provider to connect your P910i to the  
network.The service provider could be:  
GPRS  
If your network operator supports GPRS, a GPRS Internet  
account allows you to:  
An Internet Service Provider (ISP) which connects you to the  
Internet.  
An access point provided by your network operator.  
Remain permanently connected to the Internet without being  
charged for connection time. With a GPRS account, you are  
charged for the amount of information you view, download  
or send when your are connected to the Internet. Check your  
operator for details of your subscription.  
A private service provider such as your company or your  
bank.  
You will need to enter specific service provider details into your  
P910i to set up an Internet account. It can hold the details of  
multiple service providers, for example, you may have separate  
Internet and corporate accounts.  
Avoid having to reconnect to the Internet if the connection is  
broken.  
Dial-up  
Your network operator or retailer may have pre-installed  
services, check with them.  
For both Dial-Up and High-Speed Dial-Up accounts, you are  
charged for the length of time you are connected. If your  
network operator supports them, you can increase your  
connection speed (at a cost) by setting up a high-speed account.  
Getting started with Internet and Messages  
179  
           
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Accepting new Internet or Messages  
settings  
Automatically set up service  
provider and messaging  
New phone set-up messages will appear in the Auto setup  
The easiest way to set up your P910i is automatically, through  
your service provider.  
account inbox of  
Messages. (Phone set-up messages for  
email accounts will, however, be found in your SMS inbox.)  
For  
of:  
Messages settings your P910i supports automatic setup  
When an phone set-up message appears, select it.  
A dialog with a brief text and operator message appears on the  
screen. You can accept the new settings or leave the message in  
email accounts  
the inbox  
.
MMS message (Multimedia Messaging Service) settings.  
If the name of the new account is the same as that of an existing  
account you can choose to create a new account with the same  
name or replace the existing account.  
Check your service provider's Web site for information or  
contact their support desk and ask about automatic remote  
phone set-up of ISP (Internet Service Provider) settings, email  
and MMS message settings.  
Note Never accept remote phone set-up messages if you are not  
expecting them or are unsure where they have come from.  
If remote phone set-up is possible, they will send you the phone  
set-up messages required by SMS message.  
Settings valid for your network operator and one or more of  
these services may also be available through the phone setup-  
message generator at www.SonyEricsson.com/support  
Manually set up service  
provider  
As an alternative to setting up an Internet account automatically,  
To check that your SMS messaging settings are correct  
you can enter the settings manually from  
Control panel >  
1. Select  
Control panel > Connections > Messaging accounts >  
Connections > Internet accounts.  
SMS.  
First collect all the information you will need. You can obtain  
this information from your ISP (Internet Service Provider), or if  
2. Check the information, for example the address of the service  
centre.  
180  
Getting started with Internet and Messages  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
you are connecting to a corporate network, your information  
services department.  
The dialog has four tabs, one for each type of messaging  
service:  
Email  
The provider of your email service, or for a corporate  
account, your information services manager can provide  
you with the necessary details.  
All settings are described in ‘Email tab’ on page 168.  
To set up a new account follow the steps under ‘To create a  
new email account’ on page 168.  
All settings are described in ‘Internet accounts’ on page 163.  
To set up a new account follow the steps under ‘To create a new  
Internet account’ on page 164.  
SMS  
MMS  
Short Message Service  
The necessary settings are usually provided on your SIM  
card.  
Manually set up messaging  
As an alternative to setting up Messages automatically, you can  
enter the settings for the messaging services you want to use  
All settings are described in ‘SMS tab’ on page 170.  
yourself from  
Control panel > Connections > Messaging  
Multimedia Messaging Service  
Your MMS messaging provider will be able to provide you  
with the necessary information.  
Before you set up MMS messaging you need to set up an  
Internet account in Control panel > Connections > Internet  
accounts and a WAP account in Control panel >  
Connections > WAP accounts  
accounts  
.
First collect all the information you will need. You can obtain  
this information from the following sources:  
If your network operator offers an email service you can get  
the necessary details from them.  
All settings are described in ‘MMS tab’ on page 171.  
Your Internet service provider.  
Area  
Cell Broadcast Service: Area and Cell information  
Your network operator will be able to inform you if these  
services are available.  
Your information services manager in the case of connecting  
to the corporate network to access your work email account.  
All settings are described in ‘Area tab’ on page 172.  
Your network operator in the case of SMS message and Cell  
Broadcast Services.  
Getting started with Internet and Messages  
181  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
First collect all the information you will need. You can obtain  
Setting up WAP accounts  
this information from the WAP service provider, or if you are  
A WAP account (sometimes called a WAP profile) defines a  
connecting to a corporate network, your information services  
service provider and gateway that should be used when making  
manager.  
a connection to WAP services. You also need a WAP account  
when you use MMS message (Multimedia Messaging Service).  
All settings are described in ‘WAP accounts’ on page 173.  
To set up a new account follow the steps under ‘To create a new  
WAP account’ on page 173.  
The WAP gateway sits between your P910i and the WAP site  
coding and decoding information. You can set up details of more  
than one gateway if necessary, for example one for your MMS  
messaging, one to access corporate data over WAP, and another  
to access your bank's WAP service.  
Using your P910i as a modem  
Your P910i contains a complete GSM/GPRS modem, so you  
can use it to connect your PC to the Internet or corporate  
intranet.Your P910i appears to the laptop like a normal modem.  
The easiest way to set up a WAP account on your P910i is  
automatically, through your service provider. Check your  
service provider's Web site for information or contact their  
support desk and ask about automatic setup. You can also find  
more information, and settings for many operators on:  
http://www.SonyEricsson.com/support.  
You link the laptop to your P910i using Bluetooth wireless  
technology, infrared, or cable (USB or serial).The connection  
over the air can be by any of the bearers that your P910i  
supports:  
Note You access WAP pages through an Internet Service  
Provider (ISP) so, when you create a WAP account, you must  
choose one of your existing Internet accounts or first create a  
new one.  
GPRS  
HSCSD (High-speed Circuit Switched Data)  
CSD (Circuit Switched Data).  
Manually set up a WAP account  
Instead of setting up a WAP account automatically, you can  
A Windows modem driver file and a PC utility, the Dial-Up  
Networking Wizard, is provided on your Sony Ericsson PC Suite CD.  
The wizard will help you configure DUN (Dial-Up Networking)  
entries on your PC for GPRS and HSCSD connections.  
enter the settings manually from  
Control panel > Connections >  
WAP accounts  
.
182  
Getting started with Internet and Messages  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Once paired with a Bluetooth-enabled laptop, your P910i is  
ready to make a connection to the Internet or corporate network.  
Since Bluetooth is wire-free and requires no line-of-sight  
alignment, you can place the laptop in a comfortable position  
and let your P910i remain in your pocket, briefcase, or even be  
placed up to 10 metres away.  
wireless technology. See ‘Connecting to other devices’ on  
page 143.  
Make sure that you have any information concerning, for  
example, phone numbers, names of servers or domains, that the  
server that you want to connect to may require.  
To set up a GPRS or HSCSD (High-Speed Circuit Switched  
Data) connection using the Dial-Up Networking Wizard  
If you wish to use an infrared link, the range is typically up to  
one metre. The two infrared ports must be kept in line of sight,  
at an angle of no more than approximately 30 degrees.  
1. Start the Dial-Up Networking Wizard from the Sony Ericsson  
folder of the Start menu on your PC.  
The Dial-Up Networking Wizard  
2. Choose Create a new Dial-Up connection.  
3. Follow the instructions in the wizard.  
The wizard simplifies creating GPRS DUN connections by  
setting the proper values in the PC DUN entry and linking the  
entry to one of the GPRS configurations in your P910i. You can  
also view and modify the GPRS settings in the P910i.  
To edit a previously created DUN entry  
1. Start the Dial-Up Networking Wizard from the Sony Ericsson  
folder of the Start menu on your PC.  
For HSCSD DUN entries, the wizard updates the modem  
settings such that the specified data rate and type of bearer  
(ISDN / Analogue) will be used when you make a DUN  
connection.  
2. Modify a Dial-Up connection.  
3. Select the desired connection from the list.  
4. Follow the instructions in the wizard.  
You can view or change the DUN entries created with the  
wizard using the standard Windows DUN user interface.  
To define P910i as a modem  
To set up a CSD (GSM Data) or HSCSD connection you will  
need to install your P910i as a modem manually.  
The Dial-Up Networking Wizard software included in the Sony  
Ericsson PC Suite must be installed in your PC and your P910i  
must be connected to the PC via cable, infrared or Bluetooth  
Getting started with Internet and Messages  
183  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To set up a Dial-Up entry for CSD or HSCSD  
1. On the PC, open the Control Panel.  
2. Choose to install a new modem.  
A combined signal strength and GPRS signal icon provides  
information on the GPRS service status. The GPRS connection  
status appears above the signal strength icon. There are three  
states for the icon, unavailable  
attached  
, available  
and  
3. Choose your P910i as the modem.  
4. Select the port where the P910i is connected.  
.
The HSCSD/CSD  
a data connection. Where GPRS is suspended, for example, the  
GPRS suspended state is indicated by a combined icon  
There are three states for the GPRS icon: Active  
active transferring data (alternates between and  
and suspended . Any data transfer either received or sent  
and GPRS  
icons are displayed during  
5. Confirm the selection. A new DUN connection has been  
created.  
.
,
)
Connecting  
To connect using a DUN entry created by the wizard  
activates the GPRS active icon for 5 seconds.  
1. If you are connecting by cable, set your P910i to Modem cable  
connection mode, see ‘Cable’ on page 162.  
Connection information  
2. Use any conventional method to make a connection:  
– Click the Desktop shortcut created by the wizard.  
– Select the entry from within the system DUN folder.  
When you select the data connection icon, during an active data  
connection, a menu appears with the choices Information and  
Disconnect  
.
– Run an application that has built-in support for using  
DUN entries (for example a browser or email client).  
Select Information to view information on the connection.  
Select Disconnect to end the connection.  
GPRS status information  
When the signal strength icon is selected, network, GPRS status  
information and, if applicable, GPRS error text appear.  
GPRS - connection information  
Icons on the status bar let you overview the information on data  
connection calls.  
184  
Getting started with Internet and Messages  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To delete or reset the log of several accounts  
GPRS data log  
1. Select the check boxes of the accounts in the list to be deleted  
or reset.  
A new GPRS data log entry is created when a GPRS account  
establishes a connection for the first time. It does not wait for  
transfer data. If there is an existing data log associated with the  
current GPRS connection, this is updated.  
2. Select GPRS data log > Reset or GPRS data log > Delete  
.
Session data  
The GPRS data log shows a list of GPRS Internet accounts.  
Where one account is active or suspended, the relevant status  
icon is displayed to the left of the account.  
When the connection is deactivated, for example when the  
current Internet account is disconnected, the total data sent and  
received in the last session is displayed.  
To view information on an account  
The information is displayed for a couple of seconds. To dismiss  
the information when the flip is closed, press  
.
1. Select an account in the list.  
2. Information on the account is shown. The data log is updated  
dynamically.  
Buttons allow you to delete or reset the current data. These  
buttons are disabled during an active or suspended  
connection.  
To delete the log for an account  
1. Select an account in the list.  
2. Select GPRS data log > Delete  
.
To reset the log of an account  
1. Select an account in the list.  
2. Select GPRS data log > Reset  
.
Getting started with Internet and Messages  
185  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
REFERENCE  
Troubleshooting  
This chapter consists of a selection of suggestions for solving  
possible problems with your P910i. If this does not help, please  
Start-up problems  
try the Knowledge base on the global support site,  
www.SonyEricsson.com/support. There you also find other  
information that can be helpful.  
P910i will not  
start  
• Handheld phone: recharge or replace the battery.  
• Make sure the contacts on the battery and  
charger are clean and avoid charging the battery  
in extreme temperatures.  
Your P910i also contains help files with additional information.  
Access help with the menu option Edit > Help or, in many dialog  
Vehicle Handsfree: check that the P910i is  
properly inserted into the holder and check the  
fuse in the fuse holder (connected to the battery  
cable).  
boxes, with the help icon  
.
To improve performance, you can update the software of your  
P910i. See “Sony Ericsson Update Service” on page 142.  
Lock problems  
If you need to hand in your P910i for repair, please note that you  
may lose information and content that you have saved in your  
P910i. You are advised to make a copy of such information  
(make a backup) before handing your P910i in for repair.  
Insert card  
• Make sure a SIM card is activated and inserted  
into your P910i. See ‘SIM card’ on page 12.  
Blocked SIM  
card  
If your PIN is entered incorrectly three times in a  
row, the SIM card will be blocked. You can  
unblock it by using your PUK. See ‘SIM card lock’  
on page 43.  
186  
Troubleshooting  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Device lock  
Phone locked is displayed followed by the prompt  
Communication problems  
Enter lock code  
.
Telephone does • The received signal can be too weak, possibly  
Your P910i is locked to prevent unauthorized use.  
To unlock the P910i:  
• Enter your device lock code, 0000 by default,  
not work  
because you are being shielded from the signal.  
Check your display signal strength indicator.  
Move outdoors or up from the ground to obtain a  
sufficiently strong signal.  
then press  
or  
.
• Make sure the P910i is not set in Flight mode.  
Key symbol  
The keypad is locked to prevent unintentional key  
action.  
Your P910i might be busy sending or receiving  
data or email.  
Press  
keys.  
followed by  
to unlock the  
• Check the settings for diverting or restricting  
calls. See ‘Divert calls’ on page 59, ‘Accept  
calls’ on page 60 and ‘Restrict calls’ on page 60.  
Indicator light  
Flashes red  
This indicates that the battery is running low and  
soon needs recharging or replacing with a spare.  
• With Vehicle Handsfree (VHF) equipment, make  
sure that the following are inserted or connected:  
Your P910i and its holder, the fuse in the fuse  
holder, and/or the external antenna.  
• If Emergency calls only is displayed on the  
screen, you are not allowed to use the network  
within range. You can, however, usually make an  
emergency call using the emergency number.  
• If No network is displayed on the screen, you are  
in an area that is not covered by a network or the  
received signal is too weak.  
Does not flash  
If the indicator light at the top of your P910i does  
not flash and no network is displayed there is no  
network within range. See ‘Telephone does not  
work’ on page 187.  
Cannot hear  
incoming call  
• Increase the ring signal volume.  
Your P910i is set in silent mode.  
Your P910i is set in Flight mode.  
Troubleshooting  
187  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
The person I  
am talking to  
has a problem  
hearing what I  
am saying  
• Make sure you do not cover the microphone  
when you talk. You find the microphone at the  
bottom of the phone, next to the connector.  
Cannot use  
e-mail  
• Check with your service provider that your  
subscription includes email.  
• The settings might not be correct. Enter new  
settings. Use the phone setup-message generator  
for email on www.SonyEricsson.com/support  
to send you an auto setup message, or contact  
your service provider. See also “Email tab” on  
page 168.  
You could be almost out of network range. The  
sound improves with a better network  
connection.  
Cannot use  
WAP  
Your subscription does not include WAP. Check  
with your service provider.  
Fax calls  
Your P910i does not support fax transmission.  
Even if your operator subscription supports fax  
transmission, fax calls will be rejected. However,  
they can be diverted to another number such as  
the office fax number, see ‘Divert calls’ on  
page 59 for more information.  
• The settings are not correct. Enter new settings.  
Contact you service provider or visit  
www.SonyEricsson.com/support and use the  
WAP phone setup-message generator.  
Cannot send  
nor receive  
SMS or MMS  
Your subscription does not include SMS or  
MMS. Check with your service provider.  
• Make sure potential fax callers do not try to send  
a fax to your P910i as they can experience a  
number of retries before the fax transmission is  
stopped.  
• Check with you service provider that you have  
entered the correct Service Centre phone  
number.  
• Check the settings in the Control panel. Contact  
you service provider or visit  
www.SonyEricsson.com/support and use the  
MMS phone setup-message generator.  
• Make sure that Flight mode is deactivated.  
• Phone memory might be full. Delete some  
pictures or music, for example.  
188  
Troubleshooting  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Cannot  
establish  
• Make sure that the devices are correctly paired.  
See ‘Connection via Bluetooth wireless  
technology’ on page 144.  
Problems to connect to a PC or another device  
Not possible to • Make sure that the Sync Station and cable is  
connection with  
a Bluetooth  
wireless  
technology  
handset or  
handsfree  
establish  
correctly connected to the PC.  
• Make sure that the handset or handsfree is  
charged.  
connection  
using cable  
• Make sure that the correct COM port on the PC  
is enabled. Right-click the P910i link symbol in  
the PC taskbar, and select Properties. Select the  
USB COM port.  
• Make sure that the devices are in range with each  
other.  
• Make sure the device lock is not active.  
Cannot find PC You can find PC software on  
• Uninstall Sony Ericsson PC Suite. Connect the  
Sync Station with the P910i to the PC. Reinstall  
Sony Ericsson PC Suite, following the  
installation procedure carefully.  
software for  
downloading  
www.SonyEricsson.com/support and also on  
local sites.  
Cannot use my • First ask your service provider to enable your  
• Check for Sony Ericsson PC Suite updates on  
www.SonyEricsson.com/support. If you find  
a new version of the program, download it and  
install this instead of the old one.  
P910i as a  
modem  
data connection.  
• Then connect your P910i to your PC with cable,  
Bluetooth technology, or infrared. See “Using  
your P910i as a modem” on page 182,  
“Connecting to other devices” on page 143, and  
Knowledge base on www.SonyEricsson.com/  
support  
Cannottransfer Place the P910i in the Sync Station. In the PC,  
pictures  
open My P910i and browse through the P910i file  
system to find the picture.  
Cannottransfer • Make sure that Bluetooth wireless technology is  
items with  
Bluetooth  
wireless  
activated.  
• Make sure that the devices are in range with each  
other. Maximum range is 10 metres.  
technology  
Troubleshooting  
189  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Cannot  
synchronize  
with my PC  
• Connect to your PC with cable, Bluetooth  
technology, or infrared. See “Connecting to  
other devices” on page 143.  
Storage  
Manager  
You can also use the storage manager to free up  
memory.  
• Select  
Applications >  
Control  
• Then install Sony Ericsson PC Suite, and make  
necessary settings. See “Synchronization and  
backup” on page 148 and the help files in Sony  
Ericsson PC Suite. See also Knowledge base on  
www.SonyEricsson.com/support  
panel > Device > Storage manager.  
• A list of all applications and their memory  
requirements is shown.  
• See ‘Deleting or copying general files’ on  
page 177 and ‘Deleting information from  
applications’ on page 177.  
Memory full  
When your P910i has no more space available to  
Information in Use the applications to remove unused or old items  
save or store information, the icon  
is shown in  
applications  
from the P910i internal memory:  
WAP history or bookmarks.  
• Messages.  
the status bar. You must then free up memory to  
ensure the proper functioning of the P910i.  
• Make sure regular backups are made with  
Communications Suite to reduce the risk of lost  
or corrupted information.  
• Contacts.  
• Call logs.  
• Calendar tasks or appointments.  
• Jotter notes.  
Storage Wizard  
• Tap the icon  
in the status bar to start the  
Miscellaneous  
Storage Wizard, or start it in the application  
launcher. Then use the storage wizard to move  
items from the P910i internal memory to a  
Memory Stick, or remove items from the P910i  
memory.  
Cannot save on You might have a Memory Stick with a lock  
Memory Stick  
switch. Move the switch in the other direction.  
• The Memory Stick might be full. Delete some  
files on it.  
190  
Troubleshooting  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Tap on display  
does not work  
Applications  
stop responding  
• Close the flip and open it again.  
Occasionally you may find that you tap one  
item (for example a button or menu option)  
but another is activated. Calibrating the  
screen ensures that the correct item is  
activated. Tap Control panel > Device tab >  
Display > Screen tab > Calibrate screen and  
follow the instructions.  
• Turn off the P910i and turn it on again.  
• Remove the battery, wait about 10 seconds, and  
insert it again.  
• Phone memory might be full. Delete some  
pictures or music, for example.  
• If the problem continues, do a master reset. See  
‘Master reset’ on page 176. All data will be lost.  
Cannot change • The first time you start the P910i you select a  
language  
language. All other languages are then deleted, in  
order to free memory. You can find all languages  
on the Sony Ericsson PC Suite CD. From the  
CD, you can install the language you want. You  
can find more languages on  
System failure  
In the case of a system failure, your P910i will  
flash an animated warning. To recover, please  
restart the P910i like this:  
• Press and hold the On/Off button for at least 10  
seconds to turn the P910i off.  
www.SonyEricsson.com/support  
• Restart as normal: Press the On/Off button to  
turn on your P910i.  
• When you have installed a new language, you  
have to turn your P910i off and then on again for  
the change to take effect.  
Incorrect  
character  
appears when  
keyboard key is  
pressed  
• The wrong keyboard type can be specified in the  
control panel. Make sure the correct settings are  
defined in Control panel > Other tab > Flip  
settings > Flip keyboard  
.
Troubleshooting  
191  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Please read this information before using your mobile phone.  
Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure and SAR  
Your mobile phone is a low-power radio transmitter and receiver. When it is turned  
on, it emits low levels of radio frequency energy (also known as radio waves or  
radio frequency fields).  
Note Important: to avoid hearing impairment, answer call or lower volume before  
placing this product to your ear.  
Recommendations  
Governments around the world have adopted comprehensive international safety  
guidelines, developed by scientific organizations, e.g. ICNIRP (International Com-  
mission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) and IEEE (The Institute of Electri-  
cal and Electronics Engineers Inc.), through periodic and thorough evaluation of  
scientific studies. These guidelines establish permitted levels of radio wave expo-  
sure for the general population. The levels include a safety margin designed to  
assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health, and to account for any  
variations in measurements.  
• Always treat your product with care and keep it in a clean and dust-free place.  
• Do not expose your product to liquid or moisture or humidity.  
• Do not expose your product to extreme high or low temperatures.  
• Do not expose your product to open flames or lit tobacco products.  
• Do not drop, throw or try to bend your product.  
• Do not paint your product.  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) is the unit of measurement for the amount of radio  
frequency energy absorbed by the body when using a mobile phone. The SAR  
value is determined at the highest certified power level in laboratory conditions,  
but the actual SAR level of the mobile phone while operating can be well below  
this value. This is because the mobile phone is designed to use the minimum power  
required to reach the network.  
• Do not use your product near medical equipment without requesting permission.  
• Do not use your product when in, or around aircraft, or areas posted ‘turn off  
two-way radio’.  
• Do not use your product in an area where a potentially explosive atmosphere  
exists.  
Variations in SAR below the radio frequency exposure guidelines do not mean that  
there are variations in safety. While there may be differences in SAR levels among  
mobile phones, all Sony Ericsson mobile phone models are designed to meet radio  
frequency exposure guidelines.  
A separate leaflet with SAR information for this mobile phone model is included  
with the material that comes with this mobile phone. This information can also be  
found, together with more information on radio frequency exposure and SAR, on:  
www.SonyEricsson.com.  
• Do not place your product or install wireless equipment in the area above your  
car’s airbag.  
• Do not attempt to disassemble your product. Only Sony Ericsson authorized  
personnel should perform any service.  
Antenna  
Only use an antenna that has been specifically designed by Sony Ericsson for your  
mobile phone. Use of unauthorized or modified antennas could damage your  
mobile phone and may violate regulations, causing loss of performance and SAR  
levels above the recommended limits (see below).  
Driving  
Please check if local laws and regulations restrict the use of mobile phones while  
driving or require drivers to use handsfree solutions. We recommend that you use  
only Sony Ericsson handsfree solutions intended for use with your product. Please  
note that because of possible interference with other equipment, some vehicle  
manufacturers forbid the use of mobile phones in their vehicles unless a handsfree  
kit with an external antenna supports the installation.  
Efficient use  
Hold your mobile phone as you would any other phone. Do not cover the top of the  
phone when in use, as this affects call quality and may cause the phone to operate  
at a higher power level than needed, thus shortening talk and standby times.  
192  
Guidelines for safe and efficient use  
           
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Always give full attention to driving and pull off the road and park before making  
or answering a call if driving conditions so require.  
Mobile phones operate using radio signals, which cannot guarantee connection  
under all conditions. Therefore you should never rely solely upon any mobile  
phone for essential communications (e.g. medical emergencies).  
Emergency calls may not be possible on all cellular networks or when certain net-  
work services and/or mobile phone features are in use. Check with your local ser-  
vice provider.  
Personal Medical Devices  
Mobile phones may affect the operation of cardiac pacemakers and other  
implanted equipment. Please avoid placing the mobile phone over the pacemaker,  
e.g. in your breast pocket. When using the mobile phone, place it at the ear oppo-  
site the pacemaker. If a minimum distance of 15 cm (6 inches) is kept between the  
mobile phone and the pacemaker, the risk of interference is limited. If you have  
any reason to suspect that interference is taking place, immediately turn off your  
mobile phone. Contact your cardiologist for more information.  
Battery Use and Care  
We recommend that you fully charge the battery before you use your mobile phone  
for the first time. The battery can only be charged in temperatures between +5°C  
(+41°F) and +45°C (+113°F).  
For other medical devices, please consult the manufacturer of the device.  
A new battery or one that has not been used for a long time could have reduced  
capacity the first few times it is used.  
Children  
The talk and standby times depend on the actual transmission conditions when  
using the mobile phone. If the mobile phone is used near a base station, less power  
is required and talk and standby times are prolonged.  
A rechargeable battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times. How-  
ever, it will eventually wear out – this is not a defect. When the talk-time or  
standby time is noticeably shorter, it is time to replace your battery. Sony Ericsson  
recommends that you use only batteries and chargers approved by Sony Ericsson.  
DO NOT ALLOW CHILDREN TO PLAY WITH YOUR MOBILE PHONE OR  
ITS ACCESSORIES. THEY COULD HURT THEMSELVES OR OTHERS, OR  
COULD ACCIDENTALLY DAMAGE THE MOBILE PHONE OR ACCESSO-  
RIES. YOUR MOBILE PHONE AND ITS ACCESSORIES MAY CONTAIN  
SMALL PARTS THAT COULD BE DETACHED AND CREATE A CHOKING  
HAZARD.  
Warning! May explode if disposed of in fire.  
Disposing of the Product  
• Use only Sony Ericsson branded original batteries and chargers  
intended for use with your mobile phone. Other chargers may  
not charge sufficiently or may produce excessive heat. Using  
other batteries and chargers could be dangerous.  
Your mobile phone should not be placed in municipal waste. Please check local  
regulations for disposal of electronic products.  
Power Supply  
• Do not expose the battery to liquid.  
Connect the AC power adapter only to designated power sources as marked on the  
product. Make sure the cord is positioned so that it will not be subjected to damage  
or stress. To reduce the risk of electric shock, unplug the unit from any power  
source before attempting to clean it. The AC power adapter must not be used out-  
doors or in damp areas. Never alter the cord or plug. If the plug will not fit into the  
outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician.  
• Do not let the metal contacts on the battery touch another metal  
object. This could short-circuit and damage the battery.  
• Do not disassemble or modify the battery.  
• Do not expose the battery to extreme temperatures, and never  
above +60°C (+140°F). For maximum battery capacity, use the  
battery in room temperature.  
• Turn off your mobile phone before removing the battery.  
Emergency Calls  
Guidelines for safe and efficient use  
193  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
• Keep out of the reach of children.  
Sony Ericsson and its service partners reserve the right to charge a handling fee if a  
returned Product is found not to be under warranty according to the conditions  
below.  
Please note that your personal settings/downloads might be lost when the Product  
is repaired or replaced.  
• Use the battery for the intended purpose only.  
• Do not allow the battery to be put into the mouth. Battery  
electrolytes may be toxic if swallowed.  
Disposing of the battery  
Please check local regulations for disposal of batteries or call your  
local Sony Ericsson Customer Care Centre for information.  
The battery should never be placed in municipal waste. Use a bat-  
tery disposal facility if available.  
Conditions  
1. The warranty is valid only if the original proof of purchase issued to the original  
purchaser by a dealer authorized by Sony Ericsson for this Product, specifying  
the date of purchase and serial number**, is presented with the Product to be  
repaired or replaced. Sony Ericsson reserves the right to refuse warranty  
service if this information has been removed or changed after the original  
purchase of the Product from the dealer.  
Limited warranty  
2. If Sony Ericsson repairs or replaces the Product, the repaired or replaced  
Product shall be warranted for the remaining time of the original warranty  
period or for ninety (90) days from the date of repair, whichever is longer.  
Repair or replacement may involve the use of functionally equivalent  
reconditioned units. Replaced parts or components will become the property of  
Sony Ericsson.  
Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB, S-221 88 Lund, Sweden, (Sony Eric-  
sson), provides this Limited Warranty for your mobile phone and original acces-  
sory delivered with your mobile phone (hereinafter referred to as "Product").  
Should your Product need warranty service, please return it to the dealer from  
whom it was purchased, or contact your local Sony Ericsson Customer Care Centre  
(national rates may apply) or visit www.SonyEricsson.com to obtain further infor-  
mation.  
3. This warranty does not cover any failure of the Product due to normal wear and  
tear, or due to misuse, including but not limited to use in other than the normal  
and customary manner, in accordance with the Sony Ericsson instructions for  
use and maintenance of the Product. Nor does this warranty cover any failure  
of the Product due to accident, software or hardware modification or  
adjustment, acts of God or damage resulting from liquid.  
Our warranty  
Subject to the conditions of this Limited Warranty, Sony Ericsson warrants this  
Product to be free from defects in design, material and workmanship at the time of  
its original purchase by a consumer, and for a subsequent period of one (1) year.  
4. Since the cellular system on which the Product is to operate is provided by a  
carrier independent from Sony Ericsson, Sony Ericsson will not be responsible  
for the operation, availability, coverage, services or range of that system.  
What we will do  
5. This warranty does not cover Product failures caused by installations,  
modifications, or repair or opening of the Product performed by a non-Sony  
Ericsson authorized person.  
If, during the warranty period, this Product fails to operate under normal use and  
service, due to defects in design, materials or workmanship, Sony Ericsson author-  
ized distributors or service partners, in the country/region* where you purchased  
the Product, will, at their option, either repair or replace the Product in accordance  
with the terms and conditions stipulated herein.  
6. The warranty does not cover Product failures which have been caused by use of  
accessories or other peripheral devices which are not Sony Ericsson branded  
original accessories intended for use with the Product.  
7. Tampering with any of the seals on the Product will void the warranty.  
194  
Guidelines for safe and efficient use  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
8. THERE ARE NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES, WHETHER WRITTEN OR  
Environmental information  
ORAL, OTHER THAN THIS PRINTED LIMITED WARRANTY. ALL  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS  
LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL SONY ERICSSON OR ITS  
•Halogenated flame retardants are not used in cabinets or the  
printed wiring board of the phone.  
• Power consumption of charger during standby < 0.3W.  
LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT  
LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS, TO THE FULL  
EXTENT THOSE DAMAGES CAN BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW.  
Some countries/regions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or  
consequential damages, or limitation of the duration of implied warranties, so the  
preceding limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.  
For more environmental information, look at the Environmental Declaration for  
P910i at www.SonyEricsson.com  
The warranty provided does not affect the consumer's statutory rights under appli-  
cable legislation in force, nor the consumer's rights against the dealer arising from  
their sales/purchase contract.  
Declaration of Conformity  
We, Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB of  
Nya Vattentornet  
* European Union (EU)  
If you have purchased your Product in an EU country you can have your Product  
serviced, under the conditions set out above, within the warranty period in any EU  
country where an identical Product is sold by an authorized Sony Ericsson distrib-  
utor. To find out if your Product is sold in the EU country you are in, please call the  
local Sony Ericsson Customer Care Centre. Please observe that certain services  
may not be possible anywhere other than in the country of original purchase, for  
example due to the fact that your Product may have an interior or exterior which is  
different from equivalent models sold in other EU countries. It may not be possible  
to repair SIM-locked Products.  
S-221 88 Lund, Sweden  
declare under our sole responsibility that our product  
Sony Ericsson type FAB-1021012-BV and FAB-1021012-CN  
and in combination with our accessories, to which this declaration relates is in con-  
formity with the appropriate standards 3GPP TS 51.010-1, EN 301489-7,  
EN 300328, EN 301489-17 and EN 60950, following the provisions of, Radio  
Equipment and Telecommunication Terminal Equipment directive 99/5/EC with  
requirements covering EMC directive 89/336/EEC, and Low Voltage directive 73/  
23/EEC.  
** In some countries/regions additional information is requested. If so, this is  
clearly shown on the valid proof of purchase.  
Kista, June 2004  
Place & date of issue  
0682  
FCC Statement  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is sub-  
ject to the following two conditions:  
We fulfil the requirements of the R&TTE Directive (99/5/EC).  
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and  
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that  
may cause undesired operation.  
Guidelines for safe and efficient use  
195  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Terms and definitions  
AU  
bps  
Format for audio data files. AU files have the suffix .au  
Bits per second – rate of data flow.  
Bearer  
cHTML  
Path over which data flows. Specifically in CSD and HSCSD,  
the type of phone link from the GSM network to the server –  
PSTN or ISDN.  
A version of HTML optimised for small devices.  
CLI  
Calling Line Identity. Shows the number of the person calling  
you in your mobile phone display. Your P910i will also display  
the name and photograph of the caller if they are in Contacts.  
You can then make an informed choice as to whether or not to  
take the call. Bear in mind that not all numbers can be displayed.  
To use this service, it must be supported by your network.  
Bluetooth  
Bluetooth wireless technology is a secure, fast radio connection  
technology. It is a computing and telecommunications industry  
specification that describes how mobile phones, computers, and  
personal digital assistants (PDAs) can easily interconnect with  
each other and with home and business phones and computers  
using a short-range wireless connection.  
COM Port  
Defines a serial/RS-232 port within the Windows environment.  
BMP  
CS  
Microsoft Windows Bitmap. A graphics format defined by  
Microsoft supporting 1, 4, 8 or 24 bit colour depth. No  
compression, so files can be large.  
Circuit Switched. Connection from A to B which has a fixed  
bandwidth and is maintained over a period of time, for example  
a voice phone call.  
Bookmark  
CSD  
A URL and header/title stored in the phone, enabling the user to  
go directly to a Web or WAP page.  
Circuit Switched Data. CSD is a GSM service providing a CS  
data connection at a rate of 9.6 or 14.4kbps.  
196  
Terms and definitions  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
CSS  
GIF  
Cascading Style Sheet. A feature of browsers.  
Graphics Interchange Format. Format for storing images which  
also supports animated images. Highly compressed by limiting  
the colour palette to 16 or 256 colours. It is one of the two most  
common file formats for graphic images on the World Wide  
Web. The other is JPEG.  
DTMF  
Dual Tone Multi Frequency. A method of coding digits as a  
combination of two audible tones.  
DUN  
GPRS  
Dial-Up Networking. The dial-up networking capability in  
Windows.  
General Packet Radio Services. A radio technology for GSM  
networks that adds packet-switching protocols, shorter setup  
time for ISP connections, and offers the possibility of charging  
by the amount of data sent rather than by connection time.  
GPRS promises to support flexible data transmission rates  
typically up to 20 or 30 kbps (with a theoretical maximum of  
171.2 kbps), as well as continuous connection to the network.  
e-GSM  
Extended GSM. New frequencies specified by the European  
Radio Communications Committee (ERC) for GSM use when  
additional spectrum is needed (network-dependent). It allows  
operators to transmit and receive just outside GSM's core  
900MHz frequency band. This extension gives increased  
network capability.  
GSM  
Global System for Mobile Communications. GSM is the world's  
most widely-used digital mobile phone system, now operating  
in over 160 countries around the world.  
EMS  
Enhanced Messaging Service. An extension of SMS enabling  
pictures, animations, sound and text formatting to be added to  
text messages.  
GSM 900  
The GSM system family includes GSM 900, GSM 1800 and  
GSM 1900. GSM 900 refers to GSM working on a frequency of  
900 MHz.  
FCC  
Federal Communications Commission. US government agency  
which regulates radio communications.  
Terms and definitions  
197  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
GSM 1800  
your local server. The email is received and held for you by your  
IMAP server. You (or your client email receiver) can view just  
the heading and the sender of the letter and then decide whether  
to download the mail.  
Also known as DCS 1800 or PCN, this is a GSM digital network  
working on a frequency of 1800 MHz. It is used in Europe and  
Asia-Pacific.  
GSM 1900  
IrDA  
Also known as PCS. Refers to a GSM system running in the  
1900 MHz band. Used in the USA and Canada, for instance.  
The Infrared Data Association is dedicated to developing  
standards for wireless, infrared transmission systems between  
devices. With IrDA ports, a device such as your P910i can  
exchange data with other devices without a cable connection.  
IrDA requires line-of-sight transmission.  
HSCSD  
High-Speed Circuit-Switched Data (HSCSD) is circuit-switched  
wireless data transmission for mobile users at data rates of up to  
64 kbps.  
ISDN  
Integrated Services Digital Network. Communication protocol  
offered by phone companies that permits phone networks to  
carry data, voice, and other source traffic. Selecting ISDN for  
CSD/HSCSD connections provides quicker call setup.  
HTML  
Hypertext Markup Language is the set of markup symbols or  
codes inserted in a file intended for display on a World Wide  
Web browser page. The markup tells the Web browser how to  
display a Web page's words and images.  
ISP  
Internet Service Provider. An organization that provides access  
to the Internet.  
HTTP  
HyperText Transfer Protocol. The communications protocol  
used to connect to servers on the World Wide Web. Its primary  
function is to establish a connection with a Web server and  
transmit HTML pages to the client browser.  
JFIF  
JPEG File Interchange Format.  
JPEG  
IMAP4  
Joint Photographic Experts Group, best known for the .JPG  
format for still image compression.  
Internet Message Access Protocol (the latest version is IMAP4)  
is a standard client/server protocol for accessing email from  
198  
Terms and definitions  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
MBM  
MP3  
Multiple Bit Map. Symbian OS bitmap format.  
MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3 is a standard technology and format for  
compression a sound sequence into a very small file (about one-  
twelfth the size of the original file) while almost preserving the  
original level of sound quality when it is played.  
MeT  
Mobile Electronic Transactions. An initiative founded by  
Ericsson, Nokia and Motorola to establish a secure and  
consistent framework for mobile transactions.  
MPEG-4  
The Moving Picture Experts Group, develops standards for  
digital video and digital audio compression. It operates under  
the auspices of the International Organization for  
Standardization (ISO). MPEG-4 goes far beyond compression  
methods. Instead of treating the data as continuous streams,  
MPEG-4 deals with audio/video items that can be manipulated  
independently, allowing for interaction with the coded data and  
providing flexibility in editing. MPEG-4 supports a wide range  
of audio and video modes and transmission speeds.  
MIDI  
MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a protocol  
designed for recording and playing back music on digital  
synthesizers that is supported by many makes of personal  
computer sound cards.  
MIME  
Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions. A protocol defining  
how messages are sent on the Internet. For example, MIME is  
used to describe how attachments are encoded and what type of  
data they contain.  
OS  
Operating System, such as Symbian OS, Linux, Microsoft  
Windows.  
MMS  
Multimedia Messaging Service. Logical extension of SMS and  
EMS. MMS defines a service enabling sound, images and video  
to be combined into multimedia messages. It supports photo  
quality pictures, and sounds in WAV, MIDI, AMR, or Melodies  
format.  
OTA  
Over The Air. A technology for transmission and reception of  
application related configuration information in a wireless  
communications system.  
PC  
Personal Computer.  
Terms and definitions  
199  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
PCS  
POP3  
Personal Communications Services, often used to describe GSM  
1900 networks.  
Post Office Protocol 3 is a standard client/server protocol for  
receiving email. The email is received and held for you by your  
POP server. Periodically, the P910i Messages application can  
check your mail-box on the server and download any mail.  
PDA  
Personal Digital Assistant. A handheld computer having  
functions such as address book, calendar, and so on.  
Protocol  
In information technology, a protocol is the special set of rules  
that end points in a telecommunication connection use when  
they communicate. Protocols exist at several levels in a  
telecommunication connection.  
PDF  
Portable Document Format. A format created by Adobe for  
storing and distributing documents.  
Phone book  
QQVGA  
A memory in the SIM card where phone numbers can be stored  
and accessed by name or position.  
Quarter Quarter VGA, 160 x 120 pixels.  
QVGA  
PIM  
Quarter VGA size, typically refers to a portrait oriented screen  
240 pixels wide x 320 pixels high.  
Personal Information Management. Generic term for  
applications such as Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and so on.  
RS232  
PIN  
A standard for serial transmission between computers and  
peripheral devices  
A PIN is a personal identification number.  
PNG  
SC  
Portable Network Graphics. Format for storing images on file  
with data compression but without lowering of quality (loss of  
information).  
Service Centre (for SMS).  
Service Provider  
A company that provides services and subscriptions to mobile  
phone users.  
200  
Terms and definitions  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
SGML  
SyncML  
A generic markup language for representing documents.  
SyncML is a universal protocol for data synchronization,  
developed by the SyncML Initiative Ltd.  
SIM  
A SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card is a ‘smart card’,  
inserted into GSM phones, that contains your phone account  
information. SIM cards can also be programmed to display  
custom menus for personalized services, for instance to assist  
operators in providing mobile commerce applications.  
TCP/IP  
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. TCP/IP is the  
basic communication language or protocol of the Internet. It can  
also be used as a communications protocol in a private network  
(either an intranet or an extranet).  
SMIL  
TLS  
Synchronized Multimedia Integration Language. Used by MMS  
to describe how media items are to be played.  
Transport Layer Security. Used by Web browsers, for example.  
URL  
SMS  
Uniform Resource Locator. Points to a service or information on  
the Internet, for example: http://www.SonyEricsson.com  
Short Message Service. Allows messages of up to 160  
characters (70 characters if you use non Latin characters) to be  
sent and received via the network operator's message centre to a  
mobile phone.  
USB  
Universal Serial Bus. A plug-and-play interface between a  
computer and add-on devices (such as audio players, joysticks,  
keyboards, phones, scanners, and printers). With USB, a new  
device can be added to your computer without having to add an  
adapter card or even having to turn the computer off.  
SMTP  
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. Protocol used to send email  
from an email client via an SMTP server.  
SWIM  
USSD  
A SWIM card is a SIM card containing a WIM.  
Unstructured Supplementary Services Data. Narrow-band GSM  
data service. For example entering *79*1234# might return the  
stock price for stock 1234.  
Terms and definitions  
201  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
vCal; vCalendar  
WAP  
vCalendar defines a transport and platform-independent format  
for exchanging calendar and scheduling information for use in  
PIMs/PDAs and group schedulers. vCalendar is specified by  
IETF.  
Wireless Application Protocol is a specification for a set of  
communication protocols to standardise the way that wireless  
devices, such as cellular phones and radio transceivers, can be  
used for Internet access, including email, the World Wide Web,  
and newsgroups.  
vCard  
vCard automates the exchange of personal information typically  
found on a traditional business card, for use in applications such  
as Internet mail, voice mail, Web browsers, phone applications,  
call centres, video conferencing, PIMs /PDAs, pagers, fax,  
office equipment, and smart cards. vCard is specified by IETF.  
WAV  
A Wave file is an audio file format, created by Microsoft, that  
has become a standard PC audio file format for everything from  
system and game sounds to CD-quality audio. A Wave file is  
identified by a file name extension of WAV (.wav).  
VGA  
WBXML  
Video Graphics Array. Graphics standard introduced by IBM,  
having a resolution of 640 x 480 pixels.  
Wireless Binary Extensible Markup Language.  
WIM  
VPN  
The Wireless Identity Module is a data module for electronic  
identity certificates. It can contain both trusted and client  
certificates, private keys and algorithms needed for WTLS  
handshaking, encryption, decryption, and signature generation.  
The WIM module can be placed on a SIM card, called a SWIM  
card.  
Virtual Private Network. A private network that is configured  
within a public network. A VPN appear as private national or  
international network to the customer, but physically shares a  
backbone trunk with other customers. VPNs enjoy the security  
of a private network via access control and encryption, while  
taking advantage of the economies of scale and built-in  
management facilities of large public networks. Today, there is  
tremendous interest in VPNs over the Internet, especially due to  
the constant threat of hacker attacks.  
WML  
Wireless Markup Language. A markup language used for  
authoring services, fulfilling the same purpose as HyperText  
Markup Language (HTML) does on the World Wide Web  
202  
Terms and definitions  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
(WWW). In contrast to HTML, WML is designed to fit small  
handheld devices.  
WTLS  
Wireless Transport Layer Security. Part of WAP, WTLS  
provides privacy, data integrity and authentication on transport  
layer level between two applications.  
W3C  
The main standards body for the WWW.  
xHTML  
Extensible Hypertext Markup Language. A reformulation of  
HTML 4.01 in XML. Being XML, means that XHTML can be  
viewed, edited, and validated with standard XML tools. At the  
same time, it operates as well as or better than HTML 4 in  
existing HTML 4 conforming user agents.  
XML  
Extensible Markup Language. An initiative from the W3C  
defining an ‘extremely simple’ dialect of SGML suitable for use  
on the WWW.  
Terms and definitions  
203  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Technical data  
General  
Screen  
Product  
Size  
P910i standard version, BIG5 character set  
115 x 57 x 26 mm  
Screen type  
Screen size  
TFT  
Flip closed: 208 x 208 pixels, 40 x 40 mm  
Flip open: 208 x 320 pixels, 40 x 61 mm  
Weight  
155 grams with battery and flip.  
Pixel size  
0.192 x 0.192 mm, or 132 ppi (Pixels Per Inch)  
System and  
power class  
E-GSM 900 Class 4  
GSM 1800 Class 1  
GSM 1900 Class 1  
Colour resolution 18-bit (262 144 colours)  
Screen surface  
Illumination  
Touch-sensitive  
Antenna  
Built in  
Variable intensity back-light  
Speech Coding  
HR, FR, EFR supported where available, for  
high speech quality.  
Third Party Application Support  
SIM Card  
Small plug-in card, 3V or 5V type  
Operating System  
Symbian OS v7.0 with UIQ user interface and  
applications environment  
SDKs  
C++, PersonalJava, J2ME CLDC/MIDP 2.0,  
AppForgeMicrosoft Visual Basic 6 and .NET  
Processor  
ARM 9  
Load formats  
C++, Java or VB applications in Symbian SIS  
format.  
MIDP installation (JAR/JAD) from Browser or  
connected PC.  
Internal User storage  
For settings, user data (for example images,  
contacts, messages) and third-party  
applications: up to 64 MB (depending on  
application in use)  
Security  
Support for signed applications.  
Additional storage  
Memory Stick Duo, up to 128 MB supported.  
Memory Stick PRO Duo, up to 1 GB  
supported. 32 MB Memory Stick Duo  
supplied, plus adapter.  
Bluetooth wireless technology  
Bluetooth compatibility  
statement  
This product is manufactured to comply  
with the Bluetooth specification 1.1.  
Operating temperature –15° to +55° C  
Battery life, standard  
battery  
Standby time: 16 - 250 hours (Depending on  
usage method.)  
Coverage area  
Up to 10 metres (33 feet)  
204  
Technical data  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Infrared transceiver  
Phone  
Data transmission rate  
Max speed between phone and IrDA  
device (that is a PC or another phone)  
SIR: up to 115,200 bps  
Personal ring Sound clips as personal ring tones and default ring  
tones  
tone.  
supported  
formats  
MP3, AMR, AU, iMelody, MIDI, RMF (Beatnik)  
and WAV.  
GPRS Maximum Data Rates (kbps)  
Integrated CommuniCorder  
CS-1  
CS-2  
CS-3  
CS-4  
9.05 kbps 13.4 kbps 15.6 kbps 21.4 kbps  
Image size  
640 x 480 pixels (VGA)  
320 x 240 pixels (QVGA)  
160 x 120 pixels (QQVGA)  
176 x 144 pixels (QCIF) (video)  
4 + 1 Rx 36.2  
Tx 9.05  
53.6  
13.4  
62.4  
15.6  
85.6  
21.4  
Colour depth  
24 bit (16 million colours)  
Speed achieved depends on the Coding Scheme supported by  
the GSM Network.  
Storage format  
Still pictures: JPEG/JFIF, 3 quality (compression)  
levels, user-selectable.  
Video: 3GPP/MPEG4 video with AMR sound.  
HSCSD Maximum Data Rates (kbps)  
9.6 kbps per time slot  
2 + 1 Rx 19.2  
Tx 9.6  
14.4 kbps per time slot  
Pictures (Image viewer)  
28.8  
14.4  
Formats  
BMP, GIF (including animated), JPEG, MBM, PNG,  
WBMP  
Sharing via  
Infrared, Bluetooth wireless technology, MMS  
message, e-mail, PC file transfer, Memory Stick  
Technical data  
205  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Video player  
Security  
WTLS Class 1, 2, 3  
WTLS Cipher RC5 with key length 128  
TLS/SSL  
File Format MP4 (MPEG4), 3GP (3GPP PSS)  
Streaming  
transport  
RTSP according to 3GPP  
TLS Cipher RC4 with key length 128  
SignText  
WIM  
WIM interface including SIM-WIM (SWIM)  
15 - 120kbyte user-configurable; 30kbyte default.  
Cache  
Music player  
Content download OMA Download OTA ver 1.0  
File Format  
MP3, MP4, M4A,WAV, AAC, AU, AMR and  
G-MIDI level 1 with 24 voices polyphony, RMF,  
iMelody  
SMS  
Bearer  
GSM and GPRS  
Concatenated  
Up to 255 messages  
Integrated browser  
Markup languages HTML 3.2 (excluding features not relevant to a  
MMS  
small screen device)  
WML 1.3  
WBXML  
Image formats  
BMP, GIF (including animated), JPG, WBMP,  
PNG  
xHTML Basic  
xHTML Mobile Profile  
cHTML  
Audio formats  
Video formats  
3GPP, AMR, AU, iMelody, MIDI, MP3, RMF,  
WAV  
3GP (3GPP PSS), MP4 (receive only), Packet  
video, SDP  
WAP version  
Scripting  
2.0  
Compiled WML scripts  
WCSS  
Style sheets  
Images  
EMS  
BMP, WBMP, GIF (including animated), JPEG,  
PNG  
Supported items  
Sounds, Melodies, Pictures, Animations  
206  
Technical data  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Email  
Incoming mail server support POP3, IMAP4  
Outgoing mail server support SMTP  
Content coding  
Security  
MIME compliant  
SMTP authentication, SSL encrypted  
IMAP4 and SMTP  
Attachments  
Receiving and sending  
Document viewer and editor  
Microsoft® Word  
Microsoft® Excel  
Adobe® Acrobat® (PDF)  
Note The installed viewer for Microsoft Word documents  
cannot be used to view files in Rich Text format (.RTF)  
Technical data  
207  
Index  
A
- removing 12  
Calls  
Chess 89  
Accepted callers 60  
Accessories 25  
Add to contacts 59  
Alarm tones 154  
Alarms 127  
- answering 47, 49  
- conference 51  
- diverting 59  
- emergency 47  
- flip closed 45  
Chinese characters 34  
Chinese key mapping 35  
Chinese punctuation 41  
Chinese punctuations 35  
Communicorder  
- recording video clips 64  
Conference calls 51  
Connecting  
Bluetooth wireless technolo-  
gy 144, 161  
- bluetooth share 147  
- headphone 146  
ALS  
- settings 63  
- support 56  
- incoming 49  
Bookmarks 85  
Browser view 82  
Browsing the internet 81  
- international 46  
- making 45, 48  
- options 48, 50  
- preferences 58  
- rejecting 47, 50  
- restricting 60  
- retrying automatically  
49  
Antenna 192  
- via Bluetooth wireless  
technology 144  
AoC - Call meter settings 62  
Application shortcuts 152  
Applications  
- via infrared port 144  
- via SyncStation 143  
Connection type 179  
Connectivity software 143  
Contacts 105  
C
Cable 162  
- flip closed 15  
- installing 140  
- overview 26  
Calculator 124  
Calendar 113  
- creating entries 113  
- managing entries 114  
- preferences 115  
- sending and receiving  
entries 115  
Calibrate 156  
Call costs 62  
Call list 52  
- removing 142, 177  
Area information 172  
Attachments 99  
- speed dialling 49  
- two or more 50  
- voice control 58  
- adding images 153  
- creating and managing  
contacts 108  
Camera  
- to add a contact 107  
- to delete a contact 107  
Content and Application 139  
Control panel 155  
Corporate phone services 56  
- set up 61  
B
- settings 67  
Backgrounds 152, 156  
Backing up data 150  
Battery  
Care instructions 192  
Cell information 172  
Certificate 174  
- charging 13  
- information 193  
Call waiting 60  
Calling cards 61  
Certificate manager 174  
208  
Index  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
D
E-mail 91, 98, 168  
Emergency calls 47  
EMS 93  
Formatting disks 174  
International settings 157  
Internet 81  
Data backup 150  
Data restore 151  
Data storage 32  
Date settings 125  
Demo application 26  
Device lock 43, 187  
Dial-Up Networking Wizard  
183  
G
- accounts 163  
- bookmarks 85  
Games 89  
Entering text  
General functions 28  
Getting help 32  
GPRS 179, 184  
- Chinese characters 34  
- Chinese punctuation 35  
- chinese punctuation 41  
- flip keyboard 41  
- flip open 35  
- latin characters 38  
- numeric characters 39,  
41  
- browser view 82  
- browsing 81  
- signing documents 85  
- user authentication re-  
quest 85  
H
Dictionary 135  
- database 137  
Introduction to P910i 9  
IP security manager 174  
Handsfree 59  
Handwriting recognition 37  
- extended characters 41  
- history record and  
bookmarks 136  
- wildcards 136  
Disk formatting 174  
Display 155  
Disposing of the battery 194  
Diverting calls 59  
Drawing pictures 121  
Driving 192  
J
Jog Dial 19  
Jotter 120  
I
Icons 21  
Extended characters  
- handwriting 41  
- creating and editing  
notes 120  
- drawing pictures 121  
- managing notes 121  
- sending and receiving  
notes 121  
Image editor 71  
Image status 67  
Importing phone book en-  
tries 14  
Incoming call picture 58  
Incoming calls 49  
Increasing ring 158  
Indicator light 187  
Indicators 21  
Infrared 144, 163  
Inserting symbols 35  
Installing applications 140  
International calls 46  
F
File manager 132  
Find 30  
First time start-up 14  
Flight mode 53  
Flip  
DTMF 54  
- turning on 48  
K
Key functions 124  
Key lock 44  
Keyboard 35  
- flip keyboard 41  
Keypad functions 20  
E
- virtual 17  
Editing  
Flip closed 15  
Flip open 16  
Folders 29  
- spreadsheets 129  
- Word documents 129  
Efficient use 192  
Folders in Messages 92  
Index  
209  
L
Messaging  
P
Restricting calls 60  
Retry to call 49  
Ring signals 153  
Ring volume 158  
Languages 175  
Latin characters 38  
Light intensity 152  
Local synchronization 148  
Locations 126  
Lock problems 186  
Locks 42  
- accounts 93, 167  
P910i Locks 42  
P910i overview 11  
P910i package 10  
PC connectivity software  
143  
PC Suite for P910i 138  
Pdf documents 128  
Personalizing your P910i  
MMS 91, 171  
Mobile music 77  
Modem 182  
S
Multimedia messages 91, 94  
SAR 192  
Music player 77  
Screen areas 18  
Screen saver 153  
Secure tokens 176  
Security information 174  
Self timer - picture 66  
Self timer - video 65  
Send as 31  
Sending notes 121  
Service provider 179  
Services 25  
N
- device 43  
- key lock 44  
- SIM card 43  
Networks 162  
Notes 120  
Phone book  
- importing entries 14  
Pictures 69  
M
- creating and editing 120  
- managing 121  
- sending and receiving  
121  
Making a call 106  
Media buffer 76  
Medical Devices 193  
Memory Stick 22  
- adapter 23  
- drawing 121  
- sending and receiving  
70  
Numbers  
- formats 126  
Numeric characters 39, 41  
- taking 66  
Settings 32  
- viewing 69  
PIN 43  
PIN2 43  
- formatting 174  
Messages  
Setup Wizard 14  
Silent mode 53  
SIM card 12  
SIM card lock 43  
SMS 91, 93, 170  
Solitaire 89  
Sony Ericsson Update Serv-  
ice 142  
Sound files  
O
Off 14  
On 14  
Online services 134  
On-screen keyboard 35  
Options menu 16  
Owner card 111  
- accounts 93, 167  
- attachments 99  
- e-mail 98  
- MMS 94  
- multimedia messages  
94  
PUK 43  
R
Radio Frequency 192  
Recording sounds 122  
Remote synchronization 149  
Removing applications 142  
Restoring data 151  
- SMS 93  
- text messages 93  
- loop 78  
210  
Index  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
- managing 78  
- playing 77  
T
Updating the software 142  
User greeting 160  
WIM management 178  
Word documents 128  
-editing 129  
Tasks 117  
Sound notification 154  
Sound recorder 122  
Sound recordings 122  
- sending and receiving  
123  
- using as ring signals  
122  
Sounds and alerts 157  
Speakerphone 52  
Speed dial  
- making a call 49  
- set-up 53  
Spreadsheets  
- editing 129  
- viewing 128  
Standby view 15  
Start-up 14  
Technical data 204  
Text entry types 32  
Text input 157  
Text messages 93  
Themes 152  
V
Vibrating alert 50  
Video 64  
Video clips  
Z
Zoom the screen 32  
Zooming 30  
- managing 74  
- playing 73  
- saving 75  
- sending and receiving  
75  
Time 125  
- alarms 127  
- locations 126  
- number formats 126  
- settings 125  
- workdays 126  
Time & date settings 125  
To input Chinese characters  
39  
Tone based services 54  
Touchscreen lock 44  
Transfer items with Send As  
31  
Troubleshooting 186  
TTY settings 62  
TTY support 55  
Turning on and off 14  
Video status 65  
Viewing  
- pdf documents 128  
- spreadsheets 128  
- Word documents 128  
Virtual flip 17  
Voice control 58  
- making a call 46  
Voice mail 60  
Volume  
Storage Manager 190  
Storage manager 177  
Storage Wizard 190  
Storing data 32  
Streaming 75  
- changing 48  
Symbols 35  
Synchronization  
- local 148  
W
U
WAP accounts 173  
Warranty 194  
WIM 178  
Uninstalling applications  
142, 177  
- remote 149  
Index  
211  

Vidikron D ILA 80 User Manual
Toastmaster MEU30CAN User Manual
Sony Ericsson StreamMan P800 User Manual
Sony Ericsson M600 User Manual
Sony CDX F7000 User Manual
Sony cdp 338esd User Manual
Sony 76 User Manual
Samsung TS HB33 User Manual
Philips SPD2410BD User Manual
Panasonic EB X300 User Manual